Transcripts
1. Introduction: Welcome to the Ultimate I B
Photoshop fundamental Cure. We creativity meets the Canvas, and your journey to becoming
a photoshop pro begins. I am E and I will
be your instructor. Are you ready to turn
your imagination into stoning visual
masterpieces? Look no further because this photoshop
fundamental course is still made for absolute
beginners like you with the goal of propelling us straight into the
exciting realm of intermediate photoshop sel f. I've crafted this course
with simplicity in mind, breaking down the complexities
of photoshop in bite size, easy to follow lessons. Discover the magic
of Photoshop as I guide you through
the essential tools and techniques that
will empower you to transform your
vision into reality? We begin this course by laying the very foundational
skills in Photoshop, such as navigating
the interface, starting a new project, understanding the working
concepts of layers, and customizing
photoshops interface to suit your creative needs. From there on, we learn how
to color correct images, basically putting
life into d images. We don't learn how
to export files from photoshop for
different purposes, and how to create, modify and use shapes how
to be photoshop. From there on, we learn how
to create and use texts, smart objects, and
how to crop on stret in images in Photoshop. We then jump into near styles, blended modes, selecting
and cutting, masking, transform and distort,
filters and effects, image retouching and
enhancements, and then brushes. After we've covered all of this, we then go on to work on our final projects in which
you get the opportunity to review most of what
you've learned in past modules and even
learn a few new tricks. Get ready to mole the schemes. This course is not
just about theory, it's about hands on practice. We have exciting projects and assignments after every module, which will have you apply your new found skills
right from the start. Learn at your own pace
on your own schedule. Whether you're an
early bird or a night, this course is available 247 to fit seamlessly
into your life. Learning photoshop has
never been this enjoyable. Don't just imagine the
possibilities, create them. Join me in this class, and
let's together embark on an adventure that will define
your creative capabilities. See you in class.
2. Get the software: Hello and welcome to the course. I'm really glad
to have you here. In this very quick video, we're going to learn
something really important. And that's how to get
our photoshop software. Now there are lots of ways to get cracked softwares online. But honestly, crack softwares are what they are
crack softwares. They don't really give us the full functionality
and features. That genuine software gives. So in this video, we're
going to learn how to get the genuine photoshop software. So to get started, all you need to do is come to this website, you can see here, adobe.com, and you're going to be brought to a page that looks like this. So this is the home page, and I'm not sending to my
creative Cloud account. So this is actually the page you get to see when you
visit the website. And in the home page,
you get to see details about Adobe's products, right? So that photoshop, Illusto,
and so on and so forth. So from here on, all you need to do is to click on COL plans. That's assuming you don't have a critic cloud
subscription yet. But if you have one, I will
advise you sign in first. So if you sign in and
then click on COL plans, I'm going to bring you
to the page where you see all the plans
that are available. And that B provides
us with a number of very affordable subscription
plans for the softwares. So right here, we have the
individual subscription plan. And with this single plan, you get to have access
to all ADB products for just 59 and $909 per month. Okay. So this single
monthly subscription, will give you access to all of ADB creative cloud apps
that includes photoshop, light room, Premier
Pro, ADB Los to, after effects, and lots
of many other softwares. So you can as well pay
for single software, For example, this
one is photoshop at 22 point $9 per month. So if you only want photoshop, you can just go ahead
and select this one. And, of course, it's going
to be more expensive if you are going to need multiple
softwares, right? So this is the best
plan, in this category. And we also have the
business category, and this is a bit pricey. And after the business category, we have the students
and teachers category. And this is the one
I will recommend for you because it's the
most affordable plan. You get 60% of your first year. So you can go ahead and click by now and then pay for
the subscription. It continue, and then
proceed with your payment. After you complete your payment, you'll then be able to log in to your Creative
Cloud account. Softer you sign into your
creative Cloud account, the first thing you need
to do is to go ahead and download your
creative cloud app. Okay, go ahead and download
your Creative Cloud app. You have to download
your critic Cloud app and install your
Creative Cloud app. After you install your
critic Cloud app, you will then be able to install Photoshop right inside
your Creative Cloud app because your critic
Cloud app serves as a manager for all your
creative cloud softwares. Okay, it's right from
your critic Cloud app that you to install
Photoshop and manage it. And that's also true for all other creative
cloud applications. So when you sign into your
Creative Cloud account, this is what you get to see. You get to see an interface
that looks like this. Okay, so all you need
to do is to come here, click on this icon, and then go to all apps. And then right here in All apps, what you need to do is go ahead and download
the cretic Cloud app. So click on download
and it's going to download the app
into your computer, and then you go
ahead and install the app and from the app, you then get to install all other softwares
like Photoshop. Okay. So this is what the
cretive Cloud app looks like. So once in the app, all you need to do is
to come to all apps and then install Photoshop. Okay. So like you can see, it says open here because
I have it installed, so I can just click
here and open it. But if I didn't
have it installed, this button here will have
said install instead of open, just like how this
one says install. Okay, so just with
a click of button, you will be able to
install your software. So go ahead and
install Photoshop and let's meet in
the next video. So see you in the
next video. Bye bye.
3. Module Introduction: In this module,
you'll learn how to start a new project
No B photoshop, how to navigate the
interface in Photoshop. You're going to learn about
layers and how to work. You're also going to
learn about artbts, how to modify images
and resolutions. Finally, how to customize
your photoshop workspace. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue. And please reach out to me via message or you bet
and E section, if you have any questions. I'd love to make this course five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
4. Starting a New project in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hello, guys, and
welcome to this video. Really excited to have you
here because in this video, we're going to start learning. Okay. We're going to actually
go into photoshop and start to learn from the scratch. Now, in this video,
we are going to be learning how to
begin a new project, how to start a new project. We're going to learn how to open an existing project if you want to open an
existing project, okay? And we're going to just
kind of get ourselves familiar with what you can
see on your screen right now. Okay? So this is Photoshop 2024, the most recent version as
at the time of recording. So if you open your
photoshop software, this is what you're
going to see, right? This is the interface
you're going to see. Now this interface tells you or shows you quite a
number of things here. First of all,
you're going to see where it says recent here. Now, these are the
most recent works which you've opened
in photoshop. Once you're on this page, you're going to see
your recent works, and you're going to
see filter here, which allows us to
kind of search kind of search for our projects
or for our recent files. This allows us to search
and this modifies our view. This modifies our view. Now, in order to start a
new project in photoshop, you only have to
click a new file. So you click a new file. You're then provided
with this interface. We see here it says recent. Now these are the
most recent templates you've used or
sizes you've used, and then it says sd pot. So if you're going to be
creating something in the lines of professional
photography, you're probably going
to be choosing one of these template here, and you can modify
the sizes here. We're going to look at
all of these things. And now we have prints. Now these templates here are for you if you're going
to be working on prints project, right? So like a poster. So we can
see them in print sizes. Okay. We can see
that this is letter. Okay this is legal, this is tableid, this is E four, E six, e five, and
so on and so forth. We have the arts
and illustration. Now we see the template here
with the sizes and features. We have the web. Now we see the template
here, with the sizes. Okay. That we have
the mobile and film. So these templates have
basically been provided or been created for the
particular project, which you're going
to be working on. So if it's a film
or video project, you see that we have this size, which is the 1920 by ten t, that's the full HD
size and pixels. And we have different
other sizes. We have four k, two k,
and so on and so forth. Let's just come to recent.
Let's go back to recent. Let's just see we want to
create a new project now. So let's look at the details
on the right hand side. Okay. Now, this space here, It's meant for the
name of the project. And then we have the wit size, we have the height size, and then we have the units. So presently, the unit
is set to inches. Okay. So the wit size is 8 ", the height is 8 ". And then we can kind
of change the units. Let's select pixels. So it automatically converts
8 " to peak els, right? Then we have centimeters, we have millimeters, we have points, and so
on and so forth. Let us go back to inches, and then we have the resolution. So the resolution is basically
how detailed your work. Is, how detailed
your project is. Now resolution affects also
the size of your files. The size of your photoshop file, the size of the
files you export. Now, higher
resolution, of course, means higher detail,
lower resolution, of course, means lower detail. Now, this is the
unit for resolution. We have pixels per inch, so we have 300 pixels
per inch per inch. Then we have pixels
per centimeters. It's just going to
convert this one, and then we have
the color moods. Now color moods are a
little bit more adversed. But just know that, the RGB will starve for basically everything we might
want to do in photo shop. Let me just give you a brief explanation of this color mode. Now, the RGB stands for
red, green, and blue color. Now this is meant
for digital media. If you are going to
be interacting with the design on digital
media like screens, you're going to be
designing in RGB. And then CMYK, is Sion, Margin Tau, and Key or black. And it's going to
serve for print media, when you're going
to be interacting with the design in print media, or when the design
is meant for prints, that's when you use the CMYK. But the RGB is, let's just see the RGB is
kind of a big brother, so it can kind of serve
for prints as well. That's why we're going to
be using the RGB basically for everything we're going to
between here and photoshop. For the remaining
ones, you don't really need to worry about them. Oh, for the gris keel, it
basically turns everything to gris k. Just turns your
design to gris ke, so we are. That'll be avoiding Mr. Gris ke here and just sticking to RGB. Every other thing you
don't need to worry. This eight f is okay, except for this maybe. And this is the background of your document
or your project. We have the white background, we have the black background, we have the background color, we have the transparent
background, and you can choose
custom for now, we're just going to be
sticking to white background. Of course, if you click
here, you can see that you can change the color
of your background. Everything here
that says advanced, we're just going to close
it and not worry about it. It's not really important. When you are okay with
what you have here, just click Create
now diesel project and we can start
working right away. Okay, I know this
is a bit scary. The interface might look a
bit scary, but don't worry. We're going to take things, step by step, we're going to take things little by little, o? So I just want you to come
here to come back here. W it says whom, click here, and you're going
to be brought back to the interface we just left. So doll beat for this one and see you in the
next video. Bye.
5. Navigation in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys on welcome back. In this video, we're
going to be going a step further from where we
stopped the last time, and we're going to
be learning about basic navigation in
our B photo shop. And here are we on
our welcome page. Now, we're going to
create a new file. Let's choose this 18 by 8
" and just click, create. Now, if your interface
doesn't look like this, I want you to just come windows, and go to Wx piece, and then go to essentials, which has about
default in bracket. Just choose essentials and your workpiece so
look like this. If for any reason, it still doesn't look like this, you can still go to windows, go to Wx piece, and then
go to reset essentials. So if you click
reset essentials, it's going to reset your
workpiece to look like this. You workpiece has to
look just like this, just like mine, This is the
interface of foot shop. On top here, you have your file. You have your edit. You have your images.
Basically, you have your menus here. So this is your menu bar, right? Is your menu bar, and under
the file menu, you can, of course, start a new project, and it's going to bring
up this interface. Okay for a new project. Basically choose your values
and creates a new project. And you're going to see that we now have another project here. And the first project
we created and the second one which
we created just now. So that's what you do with file. Okay, you start a
new project open. Now all of this,
we're going to look at as we excel in the course. We have our s, we
have our severs, we have our s copiers, now the silver copiers, we basically receive a
different copy of your project. Does it about the file,
and then the edit. We have a whole lot
of options here. We're going to look at all
of this during the course. Then we have this, this
is your properties bar, and it changes based on
what you've selected. Okay. So now we have the move tool selected
here, and then we see this. And if we have this
tool selected, we're going to see that the
properties here change. And we have these other tools, and then it just keeps changing, based on the functionality of the tools you
selected or based on the possibilities of what
you can physically do with what you've selected
on your interface, right? We have the properties
panel here. And this is our properties
panel. Let me just click here. Now you say I'm
clicking this line. I'm clicking on this line. And when I see this arrow icon, I just click and drag
and it enables me to kind of adjust the
sizes of my panels. Okay? So I just want
to adjust this ops to give our properties
panel more space, okay? And I'm going to click
here and just bring it down just so that we can look
at the properties panels. On this properties panel, we give us properties of
what you've selected. Also, and some of the things we can do
with water selected. So we see we have
nothing selected. We just have our empty
workpiece selected. So it gives us properties
of our workpiece. It tells us this is 2,400
pixels by 2,400 pixels, and then it gives us this
this link icon here, which enables us to link the width to depth to
the height rather. If we link it, we can
adjust the boot of them evenly, and we can link it. We have the resolution, which is 300 pixels per inch. We have the orientation, we have the portrait,
we have the landscape. Now, basically, this award, the properties panel
shows us for our project. I shows us our color mode. It shows our color bits, the field, and so
on and so forth. It also shows us that sorry, I just changed this mystically,
take it back to white. It also shows us that
we have a ruler. And this is the, the ul. We can actually
remove the ruler. Let's see control R. And we see that we've now
removed the ruler, and you see that the ruler
is no longer selected. When I do control
R, it brings back the ruler and you see
that it's now selected, and it shows us the
units of the ruler. And this is pixels. You can change to inches and
we can see changing here. We have guides, and
so on and so forth. All of these things
we're going to look at as we progress in the course, but just know that this
is the properties panel. Each of these
things, we see here, each of these things are
called panels panels. We have the color
panel, switches panel, gradient panel, the
patterns panel, and so on and so forth. All of them are
panels. It contains Functionalities. They allow us basically perform
different tasks. So we have also the Leas panel. Okay? We're going to learn about Leas Lita in the next video, I think, or in one of the
videos in this module. So is the Leas panel, we have the channels
panel and so and so. There are lots of panels. If you want to see the panels, or if you want to
activate or the activate a panel just
come to windows, and now these are the panels. These are the panels.
So the ones that are checked are just the ones
that we can see right now. If we click on Pats panel, you're going to see that we
have the parts panel opened, and we can uncheck
it to close it. We see that we have, let's see, the character, the
character panel. Now if I click the
character panel, we're going to see that
is the character panel, and this character
panel contains functionalities for texts, Okay? And check it because we don't
want to DT it right now. It's a bit advanced for
this level of yours. Now, on the left hand side, is what we refer to
as your tool bar. Now, this is your tool bar, it's your tool bar
or your toolbox. We have all the tools here. You can do this.
And this is a tool, there's a selection
tool, the move tool. We have the artboard tool. We have lots of tools here guys and lots
of functionalities. This is a massive course. We're going to learn
so much, very excited. And now these are
just the tools. Here we're going to be
using. I want to just show you a quick function. If you click or if you
press your space bar, you're going to see
this hand icon, right? So if you click or left click on your keyboard
or rather on your mouse, on your mouth, you then be able to kind of pan around your interface,
or your project. You're going to be
able to pan around. You're going to be
able to go tick it up, tick it down. Just pan around. Now this is very important
because time to time, you need to zoom in, you kind of pan around to see
what's going on. Okay. Now, how do we
zooming? How do we zoom? Zooming by hoding ols and
then using our mouse wheel to role in that's for zooming in and then rule
out for zooming out. Using our mouse wheel, we can pull down lt or
option key on the mark. A on the PC or the
option key on the mark does in to zoom in
and rule out to zoom. That's using your mouse. Using your mouse. If
you're outside the frame, If you of outside
the frame and you want to just bring
everything back to frame, you can do control zero. Control zero will bring
your project into frame. Control zero. Control zero and everything come into frame. Now, what if I want to scroll up like this
or scroll down? Scroll up or scroll down, I do this with my mouse wheel. So if I just rule my
mouse wheel without pressing any other key or
without doing any other thing, I can up down. But if I want to
rule right and left, I pull down control and
then use my mouse wheel. Control, with my mouse wheel, and these are kind of
the basic navigation that are really important
for us as beginners. Okay, so now be it
for this video. I've kind of messed around with my interface or with
my wx piece rather. I can't see my layers panel. I'm looking to go
back to windows, and walk piece, and
then we set essential. Now we have everything back, and we're going to continue from here in the next video, TDA
6. Introduction to the concept of Layers in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, and welcome back. In this video, we're going
to be learning about layers. We're going to be
learning about layers, what how they work, what we can do with layers, features of layers, and
so on and so forth. Basically everything kind of. Let's see, basically
an introduction to layers, not
everything, everything. Because we're going to advance our knowledge as the
course progresses, and layers are kind
of a big Tm to learn about it means there are lots of things we can
do with layers, right? So we're not going to learn
everything in this video, or in this video,
we're going to have an introduction to layers. You're going to
learn basic stuff, the fundamental stuff you really need to
learn about layers because layers are actually
fundamental to f to shop. Now, this is a new project, the project which we've opened from the last video, right? Now, if you're not here, you can of course, go ahead
and create a new project. We learned how to do
that in the last video. Is not in this
interface, once again, go to windows, x piece, then reset essentials, or
then select essent shoves. So you can select essential
and I not still here, you can then reset essentials. So you would then be brought to an interface that
looks like this. So every new project
you start in photoshop comes
with a new layer. Okay. When the layer comes,
we see it like this. You then check your layers
panin and see it here. Now you always see it locked, and then if we try moving it, that's while selecting or move
to the fare moving layer. I selecting it and moving it, we'll see that we are
unable to select it, or rather we're
unable to move it. Now that's because it's locked. And if we click, let's
click on the Lock icon, we are going to basically
unlock our layer. Okay. Now instead
of clicking here, we can also click
here to unlock it. Now, when we unlock it, we then see that all of these options here now
come to live, right? You agreed out before
when it was locked. But when we unlock the layer, we are now able to select
these options, right? Now what selecting
the move to come and then move Move the layer. Here move the layer.
This white stuff here. Just move it. And now we
see something revealed. We see this checker
pattern revealed. Now this check pattern just
symbolizes transparency. It means behind this guy,
there is nothing else. They just transparent behind it. So it means there are
actually transparent layers. There are layers that
have nothing on them, and we can then
add stuff on them. There are different
types of layers, and I did to learn about some of them or most
of them in this video. I'll just or lock
our layer back and then bring in an image. Come to file and go
to please embedded. And then come to your projects folder for the module
to that's module two. Getting started with Photoshop
into your projects folder, and then click on this
layers one, please. Now what we've been
able to do is, we've been able to bring in
our image into our project. Now look at our layers panel, we'll see that we now
have a new layer. We now have a new layer, which is above our default layer or our Layer zero, right? This is the new layer, and this layer represents
our image here. You can see the preview here. This is the layer, and this
is the image it represents. So if we move it here, we actually move in the layer, and you'll be able to see it move here also that in the mn. Now, this layer, this image
is on top of this layer, and we can praticarly
see that it covers parts of the white we have here. I'm going to do the
same thing I just did by going to this embedded, then bring in the second
image, k. Perfect. Now I'm going to click here
to finally please our image. Now, we can see that we
now have a third layer. So we have to understand
that layers are like papers or sheets of papers
tacked upon each other. And the one that is
on top is the most visible or is the one
that is visible first. So it means if we move this guy, we're going to see
the one glue, right? So it means this guy is on top of this guy.
It's covering it. So that's basically
how Layers work. That's basically
how Layers work. Now, we can also move
the ap positions, so that we see the one below first instead
of the one on top. How we can do that is we
just have to come here while selecting our
move to click on it and drag whenever we see this blue line
appear and release it, it then means that we've brought our layer below the one on top. K below the one under. So we can now see that this
layer is now on top, right? So that's how to move
layers, how to move layers. Now, like I said, there are
different types of layers, we have even transparent
layers that we can just create and then put
stuff on, right? So let's see, for example, we want to create
transparent layer. All we need to do
is to come here, then create and then click. And then we can
see that we have a new layer and it's transparent. How do we know it's
transparent because we can see The term nail here. The term nail has a check pattern, right?
A checker pattern. And like we said before, the checker pattern
symbolizes transparency. So it's basically transparent. Now we can put things
on this layer. So why selecting the layer. Let's just come here and
this is the brush too. It's basically a brush. You
know what the brush is. A brush is used to paint stuff. So why selecting this guy, we can come to the
properties bar. We click here, we're
going to see that we are able to adjust
the size of our brush, let's just take
it to the lowest. Let's take it very
low. And when I bring my brushe we can see that
it's very small, right? And when we increase
it and bring my brush, we can see that we've
increase the size. So this is basically
the size of our brush, and this is the hardness. And the hardness is
basically how hard or how soft our painting is. So if we make it soft and paint, you can see that it's
a soft spree of paint. Now, if you make
it hard, and pin. We can see that very hard. So that, basically, we're
going to learn more about the brush tool in
subsequent lessons. We need to help us explain how we can add
stuff onto an emptier. So I've now selected
this size of brush, and then let's just make it
this hard. Not too hard. Let's make it 53% hard, and we won't look at all of
this for now. We can please. Now when we select
our layer and pints, we can see that we are on
painting on our layer, and it appears on top of all of these other layers because
the layer is the topmost one. Is on top of all of them.
Now if we move this behind, we see that it's moving
behind the one here, now if we hide this layer, can see that we are now revealing our layer,
which is behind. This icon is of course for hide. You can hide it and unhide it. Let's see you're
working, and you just want work on the
erhind this layer, and you don't want to move
the position of the layer. You just hide it and then
walk on the layer beneath it. They are perfectly satisfied. You come back and
unhide the layer. We can see that this is
an empty layer and we've added brush pints on it. With added colors on
it. Using a brush to. That's one of the ways
to work with layers. Right up here, we have
where it says opacity. Now, this opacity is basically
how much visible our A is. While selecting our LA one, when you come to
opacity and reduce it, we can basically
see it's reducing. When I take it to zero, it basically becomes
invisible, right? I increase it, we can
see opacity increasing. This is basically what
opacity does for you. Increases the visibility
of our layer. Now, apart from this opacity, we can of course
lock our layer back. We are not going to
look at all the options here for now, because for now, I just want you to
understand how layers work, and a few very basic
things we can do with layers that will
affect our daily work. So one other thing we can do with layers is we
can delete layers. So if you select this
layer and then come to this being icon here
and click on it, you're going to see foota shop asking you whether
to delete the layer. So if you click ers,
it's going to delete, and our layer is gone. I'm going to do control Z
to bring back our layer. Okay. We can delete the layer, we can add layers. We can starck layers,
keep adding layers. Okay. We can see that we can add as many
layers as we want. And we can now select
all of them and it. How did I select them all? We can select the
first one and then pull down shift on your PC, then select the last one. Then you just did it? Yeah. D. Perfect. Now one other thing
we can do with layers is we can group our
layers together. That we can now
select these guys. Let's select this
guy, that the one be needs while putting down shift, and then just drag
the both of them, and then let's release. When you release, you see
that we now have group one. So group one, we can now release with these
layers as a group. We can double click
here to ream the group, and same also for the layers, we can double click on the
names to change the names, and now we can release with
these guys as a group. We can hide them if we want. We can open the group and then work with them
individually if you want. Perfect. Now let's go
back to our move to. On our move to while
selecting our group, you then see that we have
here where it says a group. Now with this group selected, It allows us to select groups. We can make this
actually layers, which will ignore
them as a group and then select them as layers. That select each layer
within the group. But if we have this as group, we're only going to be able
to select them as a group. They are going to be
selected together. If we have this as layer, we are only going to be able
to select layer by layer. That's one quick tip
we need to know. I'm not going to take
it back to group. Perfect. And we have way,
it says auto select. No Auto select stands for
automatic select, right? So if you hover around
the auto select. Again, you see that it
automatically select a group or layer
by clicking on it. So if we have it checked, we can select the
group or layer by just clicking on the Ws piece. On the Ws piece. We can
click on the Wx piece and select the particular
group or layer. So that auto select for you. So it can come in handy
in certain circumstances. You can select
Layer if you want, and Lyer only to select
the Layer, not the group. Okay. Oh, sorry, sorry. We've spoken about
this. No the group. We're not talking about we're actually talking
about Auto Select. So if we select or
unchecked Auto Select, we won't be able to
select any other thing apart from the layer that
has been selected here. So even if we click here, we won't be able to select it
because Auto Select is off. We can only select our
layers by coming to the Layers p and
selecting it Ler panel. So that's what Auto
select is meant for. One other things we
can do for our layers. Let's just select
the boot of them, and then drag them on top of
the group, and then release. Now we've just bought
them out of the group. So we can select the group
and delete the group. Now one other thing
we can do with our layers is we can
merge our layers, so we can select this guy who do and shifts and
select the other guy, right click, and
then merge layers. Now, when we merge layers, we can relate with them
as a single layer. We've merged the two
layers together no one. That's merge layers for you. We can do that. We have many other things we can
do to layers and Lys, but we're not going to look
at all of them for now. As time goes on as we
advance in the course, we're going to learn more
about these but for now. You have learned about layers. You've learned the
most basic stuff. You need to know about layers, and that's that's the
purpose of this lecture. This, we've come to the
end of this lecture. So here I'll see you
in the next one. Bye.
7. Working with Artboards in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hello, and welcome back to
the costs in this video. We're going to be
learning about art boards in how to be fut shop. So first, things first, go ahead and create a new file. So click new file, and you're going to maintain
this whole setting. Now, when you come here, you see it says artboards. So the artboard option is
not checked right now, so I'm going to tick it. And when I tick it
and click create. We then see that up here, we have our file, and
it says artboard one. Okay Artboard one. So What are outputs? Outboards are basically what
they are outputs, the pods, which you can have
different works on, or will I say different
works pieces. So there are kind of
different work pieces or multiple work pieces in the same photoshop file or in
the same photoshop project. So for example, if we come here to the move tool
and left click and hold, we're going to see this option, and we're going to
see the Artboard two. So if you click on Artboard two, you will now be able to
modify our artboard. Okay. So now we can see
this plus icons here. So we have this one here, we have this one here,
we have this one here this one here. So let me just click here. So when I click here, we don't see that we
have artboard two. So we've kind of created a new art board using
the plus button here. So we can create
multiple artboards. Multiple art boats, physically. So what are the
use of art boats? Where do they come hand, right? So artboards are used mostly for designs which have a
lot of things in common. Let's assume I'm designing
a web page. Or a website. Even though that's
kind of not very popular or very common
these days because people use other softwares like Figma and AWB XD to create website, okay, but people can still
create website with photoshop. That's website interfaces
with photoshop okay. So let's assume you're
creating a website interface. You know that website
usually has plenty pages. And usually you're going to be using similar color schemes, similar logos, similar phones, tiles, and so on and so forth. So it would be wise to
have all your pages in the same photoshop
file using artboards. Okay. So we might have this
artboard For the home page, we might have this albut
for the About page, or if you're creating similar designs for different media. Okay, let's assume
you're creating a design for a company, and then they are going to have the same
design as a poster, the same design as a
banner of different sizes, the same design to
be interacted with in different places in different media of
different sizes. Okay. So that will be a good
scenario to use buts also. Because a lot of
things are in common. And after you
finish your design, you can just export
all the artboards. And we're going
to look at how to export from Foti Shop
later on in this course. That's basically how
to add artboards. We can just click on the line here and move our artboards. I'm holding down shift to move the artboard in this
kind of straight line, either to the left or to the bottom or to the top
of kind of straight line. I'm using the shift.
Without holding shift, you can actually move it freely. You can move them the spas. Okay, I selected the
boot of them, tb. Okay, guys. When we
select our art bots and then come to our Layers
panel, what do we see? So they appear like groups. The kind of appear like groups. If you remember groups
from the last video, they appear like groups, so we have each artboard, we can like a group,
serving as a group, so there are things that
are layers under each tbod. So if we start adding stuff, we start adding suff our toads. Let just come here. Let us come here to the
Ellipse to and click. Lets just come and
grab the ship. P the ship. Now we can see
that is at boot one, right? Now, if you open at one, we're going to see that
we have this te ship inside At boot one. Let's try it again. Put in at bot three. Open at bot three, we're
going to see that we have our second Elite ship in Ato three or under Ato three. So like you can see,
the all serve groups. And let me just come
to file and open. And come back to our
projects Folder, and still open this file. This file we used for
Layer, okay? Layers one. So just open it.
When you open it, you're going to open a
new document, right? So what I want you to do is use your mouse, your select to, rather, you move to rather, click and hold, then drag. Into our project
with the art boats. They just come to
display or one of the art boats and we use Aut four in this case,
and then release it. If you release it,
you don't see that it is now on artboard four. It displays perfectly inside
f. So if you see but four, you're going to see
that we have our image. So like I said, duplicate artbots, can duplicate ad boards using this can also delete ad boards. You can delete hitting delete on my keyboard to delete
the dd boards. So basically, that's all about artboards that
you need to know. One other thing we
can do with boards is we copy sf from one
artboard to another. If I have this guy selected
and control C to copy. I can just and hit
control C to copy. I can just come on this
albard and tt V to piece, and I'm going to paste
it on this artboard and on any other artboard I
might want to piste it on. So all I need to do is
to select the artboard, control C to copy and
control V to piece. So that's one of the thing
we can do with artboards. And this will come to the end of our lecture on artboards, see you in the next one. Oh.
8. Image Size – Modifying resolution in Adobe Photoshop CC: He guys and welcome
back in this video, we're going to be learning
about something very simple, yet very important, very basic, but very fundamental,
and important. That's image size. Image size enables
us to increase and decrease the
size of an image. Or footage of five. So let's say you
create a poster design in a particular
size, C E four size, and then the client
tells you that, okay, we want to have this version of the design in a bigger size. Okay? Let's see, well prints a flex banner with
the same aspect sue, that's the same tie between
the width and the breath. And we want to print it on a
bigger medium, flex panel. Okay? Now, if we print
that same design, you created on an
EFO paper or on an EFO document on that
big sized flex panel. There might be some
reduction in resolution. Okay. There might be some
reduction in resolution, and that's not good
for your work. You want your work to
be nice and sharp. You don't want any pixelation
no reduction in resolution. Okay. So image size
helps us with that, helps us increase the sizes of our image of our
photoshop document. Not only footshop documents, it also works with
images, normal images. Okay? So we're just going
to go to open here, click open and then come
to my project folder. That's project folder one. Which contains the project files for this particular module. Okay? So image size. So click on image
size, the documents, or this photo named image size, then click on Open. Perfect. And then we have
this beautiful little jo pull in bonny, right? This is the image. Now,
this image isn't bad. Resolution isn't really bad at. If we even go to, let's just go to the image. Now, this
is the image, right. Now when I write
click among the PC, so I have to write click
and then go to properties. When I go to the properties of this image. We go to details. We're going to see dimensions. Okay the frame sizes
of this image. Now we have 3,340
pixels by 5,010 pixels. So this image is pretty good. Doesn't have a bad resolution. Now, right in ot shop, I want you to just do on
image and then image size. So we have the short cutters
lt Control I on the PC. So we just click on image size, and then we get brought
to this interface. Now, this is the
image size interface. Now we see that
the image size is 47.9 M. And then we
have the dimensions. On dimensions here,
we have 3,340 pixels by 5,010 and then
we have the resolution, which is pixels per inch. This is 72. Now these are just the things you want
to look out for for now. Now, in order to
increase the resolution, all you need to do
is increase this. So let's take this to 300. If we have it at 300, we'll see that we now
have our file from 47.9 B to 830 31 B, that's a file size. And then we can actually increase our dimensions
using our mouse wheel. So I'm rolling my
mouse wheel up and down to kind of adjust
the dimensions here. Okay, guys. So
basically everything we can reduce or increase
using our mouse wheel. We can increase or
reduce the heights, the width, mos wheel, and even the resolution. Just take note of
this. Click Okay. We then see that our
image size has increased. Now we have a bigger image. And let's try saving
this image to see what file size we now have. So let's go to the file
and click on save us. Now, save us. It's going to
save it's in the same folder. Let's add large to them. And then click save. Click Okay. We can see that it's now
saving yet. It's 10%. We can also see that
it's saving here. When it's done, we're
going to have a new image. Now we can see that our saving progress has been completed and our file has been
saved in our folder. Back to our folder, we see that this is
the original file, which is 799 KB
kilobytes in side. If you click on this one, we
see that it's the large one, which is 33 B in side. And you can see the difference. Now, this guys taken quite some time to do because
of the large size, right? Now, it's finally loaded. You can see how much larger
it is compared to this one. This one doesn't even
take long to load. We can see different. Now, if we wanted
printing these images, this will be for a
small size print, and then this will be
for a large size print. This could go on an
or an E five paper. While this go on flex
banner on flex banner, and it's going to work
perfectly with low pixela. So that's all you need to
know about image sizes and how to modify the
image resolution. And in the next video, we're
going to dive even deeper. So we'll see you in
the next video. Bye.
9. Customize your Workspace in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, welcome back.
In this video, we're going to be doing a lot of interesting stuff with our
panels and with our piece. Okay? We're going to
be editing our piece, modifying our piece
to suit our needs. Okay, O individual needs. So let's start by creating a new project or a new file and then just choose the default
one we've been using. And then Do not select buts, just deselect outputs,
and then create perfect. Okay, first of all, let's just
look at other work pieces. So for example, we have not just the
essential work piece, we have other workpieces. Now these are other workpieces. We have the three D W piece. Now the three D wo
piece gives us makes it easier for us to work in
three D here in foota shop. Okay. So you see that when I just choose
the tree work piece, things just changed, right? Some panels got removed,
some got added. Okay. And when I choose
the graphic end web, we can see that things
also changed again. Some got removed,
some got added, okay? Now, these workpieces have
been designed based on, of course, different things
we might want to achieve. So if we're working with TD, we might want to
choose the TD bpiece. We're working with
graphics and web. We might want to choose the
graphic and web workpiece. If we're working with motion, that's video and
motion graphics, and you might be asking, Can you do motion graphics
in photoshop here? We can actually do
that in Photoshop. Edit videos in photoshop. And we're going to cover
that in the advanced cose. Okay. But we can
actually do that. So if you want to do that, this is the workpiece you
might want to be using. Okay? Now, we have the
painting workpiece which gives us access
to our brushes, paints, and so on and so forth. Our works pieces change based on the templates
we choose here. So perfect. Now let's
go back to essentials. And let's say we want to remove things, we
want to add things. Let's say we want to change
the direction of things, we don't want everything
looking like this, okay? So first of all, we just start by removing the library panel. I click here and drag. So when I click and
drag, you can see that I've removed it from
this please, right? They have three
panels right here, but I drag the
library panel out, and now I have it. Now when I click on
top here on top here, or we can see that I'm
able to move the panel. I'm able to move the panel. So I can click it and drug and kind of just stark it here and it's going
to be placed there. So you can have moved
it from here to here. Okay? You can also click
it and bring it out. I can close it if I want. You can drag the parts out,
and close it if I want. Okay? This is how to
move your panels around. And this basically
works for everything. You can customize
everything here. And you can not just customize, but after you customize it, you can also save your new look. That's your new Wx piece, okay? So for the tool bar, what you have to do is just come here to this particular
place, click. And drag it out. So you
can see that we've now removed our tools from
this place, right? So we can take it back, we
place it back if we want. We can bring it out. Okay? We can even bring
it to this place. Let's see we don't want it here. We can bring it
here, place it here. So we have our tools here. And let's see we want to change the position of our properties
bar, which is this one. Let's assume we want to
change the position. We can just click
here and drag it out. So let's have it here. Okay. Let's see if
we can dock it. Since we can duck it
anywhere else up from here. So we won't keep it
a as that I keep it here like this. So we have this. And then now if you've observed, we can see this little bar here. This little bar has been introduced into the most
recent versions of Photoshop. And this bar helps us
do very quick tasks, which photoshop senses
that we might want to do. Based on the tools we select
and based on the things we select in our viewport,
or in our workpiece. So if we select this guy now
with an empty workpiece, he's going to show
us importing image. So I sense that there's nothing and we might
want to import image, so let's import image. So we're going to import image, and it's going to allow
us import, right? And we have other things
here, other options here. We can show more properties. We can hide the bar. We can reset bar position, we can pin the bar position. We can even move it. Here
we can click and move it. Okay? So that's by the way. I want us to kind of remove
and add some things. I want to remove this guy. This is the history panel. But the history panel,
I want to put it here. Here. And then let's
tick the color. The color, let's just have
the color of see here. Doesn't look too good.
Okay. Let's move the color. Let's see. Okay, the color
doesn't look good, like this. It's continuing too much piece. So we can just Let's see we
want to have the color here. And I'm not really doing
anything specific. I'm just trying to to edit the works piece
as much as possible. I'm not having any
particular view in mind. I'm just trying to
scatter things as much as possible. And still makes sense. Okay. So adjustment
layers properties. So let's see, we want to
add some other panels. Let's see. Which
panels are we adding? Let's add the character panel. So here is the character panel. The Carter panel here. We can click here to close
the character panel, click here to open
the character panel. And we can see
that it's actually obstructing our tool, right? It's actually
obstructing our tools. So let's see. Let's
see. Let's see. We we could have
our character here, so that it doesn't
obstruct our tools. Okay. Perfect. So basically, I've been able to
edit my workpiece. Now, when I come to windows, and can come to wkpieces, and come to new wkpie. I can now name this wxpiece, and see edited kpiece. Very bad naming. But of course,
the naming can be better. It can carry the name of the particular task we
want to be achieving, or we want to associate with
this particular workpiece. But the name is in bad
edited workpiece. Perfect. Let's hit s. Now we have
this workpiece sved as the edited workpiece. So if you come to
our workpieces, we are going to see it
here edited workpiece. It's one that that is
currently selected. Let's go back and
select essentials. Now we can see that
after selecting our essentials workpiece,
nothing cheap. Now that's because we were
on the essentials workpiece. Before we created before we
sved our edited workspace. So we did all those changes
on our essentials workpiece, and it kind of sived it as
our essentials workpiece. Now, what do we do to
bring it back to normal? We can just heat
reset essentials, like we've always done. So heat reset and we have everything back
to the way it is. And we can still go back
to windows workpieces, and back to our workpiece,
our edited workpiece. And if this is the workpiece that is best for us
to complete our work, we can use it to
complete our work. That's basically it about
editing your workpiece. It's very simple
and basic stuff, but you might find it useful. That will be it for video. Okay, so see you guys
in the next one. Bye.
10. Module Introduction: In this module, you'll
learn how to do color correction in dB foto. You'll learn how to
perform color correction, using levels, curves, exposure, vibrant, saturation,
Q, black and white. Finally, using the color
lookup feature in ADB foto. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue. And please reach out to me via message or in the Q&A section, if you have any questions, I would love to make this
call five star experience vi. See you in the next video.
11. Color Correction with Levels in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, everyone. Welcome back. So we're going to start the
module with this video, and this video is on
levels in photo shop. That's color correction
with levels in photo shop. So I'll just go ahead
and open my file. Now I'm going to
come to the projects fda or module three. That's the modular
color correction in AV Photo shop, right? Now, go to the Projects funda and now you
have these files. So we're going to
start with this file. So we just click on this file, which says Color Correction
one, and click open. Perfect. So this is our image. Mother and child,
very beautiful image. Now we can see that the
image is a bit washed out. It's not looking
its best right now. So we're going to use
levels in footy shop to kind of make it
look a step better. Okay? Now levels are
a set of sliders, which you can adjust to the right hand side or
to the left hand side, and they're going
to kind of increase the richness of your
blacks and your whites. So that's what levels do. They increase the richness of your white colors and
your black colors. So there are two
ways to do this. The first and simplest w or the quickest w is basically
to just select your file. That's to select the layer to select your layer
and go to images, you go to adjustments
and then levels. Click levels and
see it here apre. We have to have
preview on so that we see the changes that we
make as they get updated. As I drag this slider
to the right hand side, you can see that the
blacks are getting richer, the blacks are getting richer, blacks are getting richer. And as we drag this slider
here to the left hand side, you can see that the
whites are getting richer. So we don't want
to do it too much. We just want to kind
of do it moderately, I think something in the lines of this will be just perfect. Now, this is like I said, the first way of doing
it quick and fast. But if you do it this way, you click OK now. We're going to see that it then implement the changes we
adjust made to the image. And we can go back and adjust or reduce the
intensity of the effect. There is the second
way to do it, which gives us more
flexibility. More control. So you're going to hit
control Z to undo. Then go here under adjustments. Now under adjustments,
we are now going to come and for levels
on this levels. The click levels, and we
see that the properties pane open and you can see
the levels interface. Now, we can see under
our layers that the levels adjustment layer has been added as a new
layer on top of our layer. So as we make adjustments here, it affects our layer.
I affects our layer. So we can bring our slider
here, bring this one here. And everything affect our
layer, which is beneath. Now, we can select
this layer and we can do to this layer, what we normally do
to other layers. It means we can hide this layer. If I hide this layer,
you can see that the level effect goes off. The effect goes off, I I unhide it, the
effect comes back. This layer, I can reduce
the opacity of this layer. I can delete this layer, I can click on this layer whole and bring it here
where it says plus, and I'm going to
duplicate this layer. I can group the
layers, I can do. Basically, everything
I do for normal layer. Okay. So let me just
delete the duplicate. And then now we can see that
just by adding these levels, we have physically increased the richness of our blacks
and our whites immediately. And levels has other channels. Okay, we have other channels. For example, this
channel we've been working on this called
the RGB channel. So it affects all colors. But we can come and select particular colors which we want to affect with
our adjustments. For example, we can select red. If you select red,
you can see that when we adjust this
takes out the red. When we do it from the right or from the left
rather to the right, it takes out the red, and we do it for the right to the left, it adds more red. You just want to do
it in moderation. Perfect. And so also we
have other channels. We have the green Channel,
we have the blue channel. Perfect. So I don't want to
adjust any of the channel. I just want to affect
only the RGP channel. So the G channel,
what I want to do. We also have this slider here, which can help us reduce the lightness or
increase the lightness. If we drag this to
the left hand side, we increase the lightness,
increase the lightness. If we drag this guy, of reduce the lightnes you
can see it becomes dark. Basically, this is
what you need to know about about levels
rather levels. So yeah, guys, with levels, we have been able to add a
bit of life to our image. This is what we had before, and this is what we have now. Perfect. So that'll be it for this video on
levels in the next video, we're going to look at
how to adjust or add more richness to our image
in cuffs in for shop. To see you guys in the next one. Bye.
12. Color Correction with curves in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome back. In this video,
we're going to take our color correction project one step further with curves
here in photo shop. The first thing I'm
going to do is I'm going to save my project. So come to file and
then click Save. We're going to save it in the
projects files to folder. That's the folder for the
current module we are in. That color correction
one, right. And then make sure you're saving it as a foot to shop file, that this particular one, which has PSD in bracket. So all you need to do is just
click save and click Okay, and now our file has been saved. So everything we are doing
from now on, we will save. Okay. So the next
effect we'll be adding is the levels effect. So go to adjustments, and then so not levels rather. Curves. So this is curves, click on curves, and
this is what we have. So like name implies
these are curves, we can curve them. Any way we want. So we can see the adjustments happening
right before our eyes, right? So we just need to undo. Cubs add more richness
to our colors. The tick our color
correction journey. Step further, basically. So first things first, we can just come and then bring our mouse on this
line. We see here. So this line is where
the magic happens. So we can see that this line on the default it
has two points. We have the 0.1 here, we have another point here, so we can select them
by just clicking, and then we can click and
hold and move this points. As we move, we see the effect, right? We see the effect. Good is, we see it becoming
too bright and good this way, we can see it becoming too dark. Seem also this one. Good is, we can see
it coming too dark. Good is we can see to Right. Okay. You just have to
know that below here, darkness and above
here, is whiteness. Okay. So like I can see
this gradient here. We have white here,
we have black here. Okay so the higher you go, the bright becomes,
the lower you go the darker it becomes. Okay? And if we bring our
mouse on the line, we can see that
our mouse then has this plus icon on it, right? So if we click, we can see
that we can add points. Here we can add points. So we can add points here,
we can add points here. You can just drag points
to adjust our colors, to adjust our image. You don't want to
do it too much. You just want to
have a subtle effect and his subtle effect. Perfect. Let's see
the difference now. Let's hide it and
see what we've done. We can see that it has taken our color correction step further, has made our colors richer, has made our whites
richer, or darks richer, Perfect. Also, we can see that we've been working
on the RGB channel. We have the red channel, the green channel,
and the blue channel, and it acts physically just like the one we saw previously,
that's levels. The red channel will
affect the red color. I'm going to do this. The green channel will affect the green color and the blue channel will
affect the blue color. So basically, guys, there
isn't any science to this. You just have to adjust it to the point where
you feel is okay. Then experience really
matters really helps in this when you do color
correction over and over again, and when you interact
with professional photos that have been
corrected properly, you tend to gain the experience
on what to look out for. On what level you want to take
your color correction to. Perfect. If we just hide this, we can see the
effect of now added. See the effect we've now added. Perfect. Perfect. I like what
you've been having so far. Now we also have a slider
here for input and output. Looking good. We don't
want to just overdo things here. Let's see. We can see that yeah, we're really getting the hang of it. I want to go in here and the intensity or reduce
the intensity of our ls. That's on our levels or Layer let's hide this.
Let's hide this. You can see this is the
initial added levels, and we're able to
achieve these levels. After levels, we added cuffs, curves step further to what
we really want to ecstasy. Basically, that's it for curves, and we've come to the end of this video on
cuffs, and the next video, we're going to go step
further into making our image the ideal image. See there and by. M
13. Color Correction with Vibrance & Exposure in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome back. In this video, we're
going to be learning how to add more life
to our images with vibrant and how to kind
of brighten our images with exposure. So we go to our
adjustment layers, and all of these effects
can also be found here. Remember, all of these effects can also be found on the images. Images, adjustments, and
then here we have them. So let's go to your adjustment
layers and then look for vibrant is vibrant.
So it is vibrant. So what does vibrance do? Vibrance increases the vibrance
physically of your image. It increases the
richness of your image. So it physically makes
your colors richer. So I take this slide out
to the right hand side, we can see that our colors become richer. They
become richer. When we take this to
the left hand side, we can see that we are
physically losing colors, right? So that's basically
what vibrance does. So we want to take this to the right hand side to a very nice level. We
don't want to overdo this. I think this is even
if we took it to the maximum, still looking good. But for some images, you might not want to
take it to this level. Basically depends on the image really, depends on the image. For this, we're going to
maybe okay with this. Let's hide it and
see the effect. The effect is sole, so it's perfect for me. I think this level of
vibrance will be perfect. Now, that's for vibrance, and let's look at
exposure, exposure. Even though this image
doesn't really need exposure doesn't really
need an increased exposure, but exposure increases
the brightness of our image and
also the darkness. We can either make
our image more exposed to light or
reduce the exposure. Basically this or this. We got exposure for you. On the exposure, we
also have what we call offset which those ds. Quite similar. To what
the mean exposure does, and we also have
gamma correction. So you might not
want to mess with the other guys that's offset
and gamma correction. Let's get one, G
it at one before. Or, you know what?
Let's just delete this layer and add it back. So let's go back to adjustment and then
exposure. So let's see. Let's just adjust
our exposure only. So let's see this is too much. So I think we might
need to maybe reduce the exposure a bit because
I think this is quite much. Let's just take our
exposure lower. This bin 0.117 is perfect. We can see the effect
is really subtle. We just makes our image less hh. It's less hh, this cool image
of mother and her baby. Smiling. Perfect. That's it
for exposure and vibrance. In the next video,
we're going to look at situation and see you
in the next video. Bye.
14. Color Correction with Saturation and Hue in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hello, in this video.
We're going to be taking our color
correction a bit further, using saturation and
care in a B photo shop. So we're going to go two adjustments and
two saturation and u. So we have our
saturation on Hu Lea, and this is the interface of
the stuion and panel, right? So we have here, we
have saturation. So we're going to start with
situation. We saturation. Situation basically
makes our image colors more saturated or
less saturated. So it makes our colors
richer. Or poorer. If you click on the slider, I take it to the left hand side, we can see that
we're losing colors. It basically works
like the vibrant, but it's more intense. We can take it to the left
hand side to lose colors. We can take it to the right
hand side to gain colors. We can see it's too much here. It's too much here,
but this level will be perfect. This
level will be perfect. T four or 24 will be perfect. So let's see 33. So Tir two will be a perfect level
for saturation. So we can see how saturation has brought our image
to life physically. We have the lightness here, which does physically this. So this is quite less important
for me in my opinion. So situation and u. Now we have hue
here which changes the entire colors on our image. So if we drag our slide
to the right hand side, we can see that all the colors
are changing except for whites and blacks and sims
to the left hand side, we can see that all the
colors are changing. You might think this is
not really important. This effect is not
really important, but we're going to see We're going to see a scenario really
gets important real soon. We can also change the layer which we work on.
That's the channel. We have the master channel, which affects all colors. We have the red, which
affects only reds just like how we saw on
our levels and curves. We have the yellows, which
affect only yellows. See we want to change
only red color. Or we want our hue to
affect only red colors. So we can see that it's only
affecting the red colors, even though it's
not very perfect because we don't have
exact red colors and This is a complex scenario
for you to work perfectly. But we're going to look at
a more perfect scenario or more ideal scenario.
That's basically it. We have different color channels which we can adjust
individually, and we have the master channel which affects all the colors. That's basically what
you need to know about this human situation, and we can close it or hide
it to see the effect of ad. On hide it to see the effect. Perfect. Now, I'm just going
to bring in one more image. That's this image. That's
color correction five. Open the image and this is a vibrant image
with vibrant colors. I'm just going to
demonstrate to you how the hue can work
in an idea situation. I'm just going to drag my
slider to the right hand side, and you're going to
see the changes. You can see changes the colors and everything just
makes perfect sense. Everything makes perfect sense because all of these
are sharp colors. Okay. Perfect. In a
scenario like this, would make perfect sense. Let's see we want to just
adjust a particular color. Let's make this zero. Let's we want to adjust a particular
color, let's see yellows. Let's see yellows,
and as we adjust, we can see that only
the yellows are adjusted. So it's more. Accurate in this scenario. What we're going to
look at a scenario or an effect that makes selective color correction
even more accurate. And you more accurate
than what can give you. Okay? Basically you guys that it for the
hue and situation. I'm just going to close this file because we don't need it. I'm just going to look at
our effects once more. In fact, let me just
hide all the effects. So I'm basically
clicking and dragging. So I click and drag to reveal, click and drag, to
hide multiple layers. So we can see that this
is where we started from. Kept having improvements
until this point. Okay? So this is a good
point in my opinion. So that is for this video
on human situation. See you guys in
the next one. Bye.
15. Color Correction with Black and White in Adobe Photoshop CC: Guys, in this one, we're
going to learn how to turn our image to
black and white. Okay. So all we need to do is to add the black and
white adjustment layer. So red we have black and white. There is our black and white. This is our black and
white. So click on it. Boom. We have our black and
white adjustment layer. Okay, we've totally turned
our image to black and white. Now we have different
presets for black and white. We have the default presets, and we have the blue presets. We can just keep
using our mouse wheel to go through all the effects. Scaling, using our mouse
wheel so the dark effect, green effects, green
shelter, high contrast, infer red, lighter,
maximum black, maximum white, neutral density red, whatever,
whatever, whatever. So we have quite
a number of them. So go back to default, and we can see that
we also have sliders, which we can use to
adjust these effects. Okay. So we can use to adjust the particular colors and how much black or
white they become. Physically, that is
for black and white. The default one would
just be perfect. This we've come to
the end of this video on black and white. See you in the next one. Bye.
16. Color Correction with Color Lookup in Adobe Photoshop CC: In this video,
we're going to look at the color look up filters. Now, visa filters. We can add to our images. We're just going to hide
our black and white. Okay. So we are now
adding the color lookup. So Color look up,
this is a Perfect. When we add it, we
see nothing changed. All we need to do right
now is come here. Sorry, Come here where
it says Lod three D LUT. So if you click here,
you can see that nos are de presets
several presets. Let's start with this
one. Click on it. Now we can see the
effect that has added. Now we can of course, reduce the intensity of this
effect using opacity slider, or if you like, you
leave it at 100. So we can go through all of the effects
we can see this one. Quite hh. You can
also see this one. You can just keep going through them and seeing
the effect the ad. Some judges in my most will to go through them.
I like this one. It's quite subtle, gives
me a subtle cool effect, but let's just go through
all the other ones. So we can see what
we have with them. Let's take this guy O. So this one has
that kind of washed out effect. Really looks cool. It is also good,
but quite harsh, maybe we reduce pay
or the intensity. We see no looks incredible. Let's just stick back opacity
so we can check the other. We have this one also pacity. We can see the very
subtle warm effect of gifts or cool effect rather. Then we have this
one. Let's see. Perfect. This one.
We have this one. We have this one. You have a
of filters to choose from. You have a lot of
options to choose from. You could have
different versions, different versions, and then just see if which
one looks better. Better one. I like this
really subtle effect. We have here. I like this really subtle
effect we have here. We have come to the end of
our video on color lookup. There are other options here, but physically guys,
you don't need to worry yourself with the options. We are focusing on
just this one for now. That's it. This one. See you guys in
the next one. Bye.
17. Selective Color Adjustment in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome
back. In this video, we're going to be looking at selective color correction or selective color change
here in A B photo shop. So go to file and open. Come to this image five. We're going to be using this
image for our experiment. Click on the image and open. Perfect. We don't have
this effect here, but we can actually still
get this defect image, then adjustments, and then
come to replace color. You click on replace color, you can see that we now have this replaced color panel. Pop. One thing we can do is click here and this allows us
to select the color, which we want to replace. Let's see we want to
replace this color, so we can now come here and then using this hydroper tool. It automatically selects
an hydroper tool for s, then we can just click and then samples this color for samples
this solar automatically. Okay. So the next thing we
want to do is come to result, click on result, and
then now we need to change this color to
the desired color. So we can see that I changed the color to this
kind of red color, and we can see that immediately everything changes
to the red color. So we can see that this kind of selective color
adjustment is more accurate than the one we saw under hue and
saturation, right? Oder Hue. So this
is more accurate, so we can I choose the color. You can choose a
different color. I can choose a color
that is a bit closer to the original so that the
blend is even better. When we are satisfied,
we can just click key. We have this option
called the foziness. Now, this fuzziness does this. You can see that the
higher the fuzziness, the better the blending. And then we have
here, which we can change the hue of
the selected color. We can see that we
change the hue. We can select different colors
using the hue slide here, we can change the
situation selected color. We can see that we now have a gray color because we've taken the situation
down to -100. If you make it higher
because we see effect. Perfect. We also
have the lightness, can make the lightness
lower or make it higher. Perfect. That's how to change a particular color in
an image more accurately. If you're okay with
what you have, maybe I'm going to
e. I'm going to choose this one. I
like this better. If you're okay with what you have all you then need to do is click and your color
is now changed. That selective color change
in to be fo for you. This will come to
the end of the video on selective color change. See you in the next one.
18. Exercise 1 – Color correction: Hey, guys, welcome back
to the first exercise, and we're going to start
by opening the image. Now if you go to
the project folder, you see this color
correction to, click on it and open. Now this is our image, and we're going to
bring this image to life sing all that we've learned from previous
videos on Color correction. We're going to use all
that we've learned to bring this image back to life. We're going to come to
our adjustments panel and then start with levels. Click levels and
then this ot levels. This looks perfect. Let
me see what we get here. This also looks perfect. Right away, you can see that
by adjusting our levels, we have made our blacks
and whites char. I I reduced or if
I hide my levels, we can see the different. This is just by adding
levels. Let's add curves. C, we get. Oh. Let's do this. Then the
defect should be just two. Okay. Let's see our red channel. Let's see our red channel. And there is this
button here which says. If you just click on auto, and it's also on the
RGB channel two. If you click on
Auto, it's going to automatically adjust it for you. I just click on auto and simply didn't do any maybe
this is just perfect. So maybe I'll just
add it a little bit. And this by friend looks
absolutely perfect. So I'm just going to go back to my RGB and let's see
what we've got here. So, this is the curves, this is the levels. Perfect. Next up, we're going
to add our our vibrant. So let's make our
colors more vibrant. So we can also see
that on the vibrant, we also have a slider
for saturation, right? So we can adjust
situation here if we want or use the
saturation and u effect. So right away, can
see that we've added a lot of richness
to our colors, by just using vibrant here. Perfect. So this is perfect. Let's go on and add
our hue and situation. Click on hue and saturation, and then increase the situation. We don't want to overdo this. This level is perfect, perfect. You can see the improvement. Basically, guys, you can
see with just a few clicks. We've taken our very
washed out image. From this to this. Okay, we've given its richness, we've given its life. We've added more
life to our image. Let see should we add exposure. Let's see what exposure does. Let's see if exposure
will do any good. Yeah. Exposure isn't bad at all. So just a little
expose more exposure. We don't want to
lose our colors. We don't want to
lose our whites. Let's be mindful of our whites. Exposure as a
little bit will do. Taking our image from
this to this perfect. I'm just going to control S, see our file color
correction two. Let's not see it as
color correction two. Let's see it as exercise one, exercise one, and then
color correction. Correction. Perfect.
So it s k and perfect. Now, that's it for this one.
See you in the next one.
19. Exercise 2 – Color correction: Hey, guys, in this exercise, we're going to be doing our
second color correction. It's good to file, open
and select this image, that's color correction
and open it. We can physically
hit control S for this and then close our file. Now this is the color
correction three image. Now we're going to
start with levels, we're going to start
with levels. Levels. Bring this. Bring this. We don't want to lose
our white colors. So we can zoom in and
see how we can scream. Yeah, I feel this works
in this before and after. Perfect. Now, the next thing
we do is add our curves. So where our curves,
these are our curves. O curves this writer. We want effect to be quite so. Okay. So this looks
absolutely amazing. Okay. We have our curves,
we have our levels. Perfect. What next, we can add our vibrance.
You add vibrance. C of vibrance, is
vibrance vibrance, vibrance, where are
you on this vibrant. You can just increase
our vibrance. We can see what we get. Perfect. We can even
take it to the highest. Perfect. Next thing is our
saturation. Saturation. Then colors should
be more saturated. You got it. Perfect. Here guys. The next thing we do is add let's add the color
lookup in this one. In the previous one, we
didn't add the color lookup, but in this one, we're going
to add the color lookup. Click on Color lookup, and then let's let's try
some of these presets. Let see. Let's see. Um, I not so fun of
this. Let's see this. Okay, guys. I want to go with
this color lookup filter. Yeah. We went from we went from having this to
having this perfect. A thanks to color correction
in A B foot shop. So being heat
controlled S for S, and then s this as exercise
two. Color correction. H s. Perfect. Now, this will
come to the end of this video or this exercise
on color correction. See you guys in the next one.
20. Exercise 3 – Selective color change: This exercise is on
selective color correction. Click open and then choose this file Color Correction form. Open. This is our image. What we want to do
is we want to change the pink color to
a different color. What I want to just do is click on my layer and then bring it here to this and
duplicate the layer. I have a duplicate, which I can fall back to
in case something happens. I'm just going to select the
layer, that the duplicate, then go to image adjustments, and then select sorry,
selective color. Please color. You please color. Perfect. I'm just going to come
here, click here, then sample the color this
color, sample it properly. Let's sample here, let's see. Yeah, this will do and then click and then come
to the results, and now we can
change the results. Let's change it to green. Change it to green and click. Now we can plays the
saturation of bits, maybe make it less saturated, then maybe the lightness bits. Okay? And basically, I
think we are good to go. Click. Okay. Now we've changed our color from this
color. To this color. Here we can see that even
this part of the image, this part of the image, got changed, got affected. There's a way to fix this, but it's a bit advanced
for this level. We're going to learn
how to use masks to fix issues like this
in the modular masks. Tune and with this we've
come to the end of this exercise on selective color correction.
Selective color change. I'm going to see
this to control S Then we select this to copy
the color or rather the name, and then change this
two to three and then selective color change. Selective. Color change. Perfect and then it save. All these project
files will be made available to you or download, so you can go in and see for yourself in
case you're having difficulties in case you want
to see Les for yourself. So do it for this video and see you in the
next one. Bye bye.
21. Home work: He guys welcome back. So this is an assignment, and you're going to use
all you've learned in the previous videos of this module to complete this assignment. So
it's a very simple one. It's just color correction. So just come to the folder. That's Project
fooler project files two for the color
correction folder. So we have this cool
correction six in this image. All you need to do is use the knowledge you've
acquired from the previous videos
on color correction to bring more life
into this image. That's just a very
simple assignment, and just share with
me your results. I'd love to see your results. So that's it for this one. See you in the
next one. Bye bye.
22. Module Introduction: In this module, we learn how to export files out of
A to B Photo shop. We learn how to export files in different formats and
for different purposes. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue, and please reach out to me via message or in the Q&A section, if you have any questions. I would love to make this course a five style experience for you. See you in the next fido.
23. How to Export your work from Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome back. In this video, we're going
to be learning how to export our files
out of photoshop. Okay? Now we're going
to be learning how to export three different types
of files out of photoshop. That's the PDF, the GPAC format, and also the PNG format. I'm going to start by opening
a new projects or opening, sorry, an existing project. I'm going to start by opening this projects on the
Color correction. I'm going to choose exercise
one Color correction. You can go ahead and open
the project. Perfect two. Let's assume I'm a photographer, and I just took this shot of edited and I
want to export or rather, I want to see the image
for print, right? Now there are two ways
to do this. I can export it as PDF, and I can also export it as GPE. So as PDF, if I want
to export this as PDF, all I need to do
is come to file, and then SS, not export CAS. And now we'll be required to
see our file in location, and of course, give it a name. So you can choose a location, but I'm just going to choose the same location you picked
the file from, right? So not to do it as PDF, all you need to do to come here. And then now you go to PDF. Photoshop PDF. You see it here. So Photoshop PDF now is it, and all you need to do
is hit save and it, and then you're going to
get the settings here, the save PDF settings. And all you need to do is
come and choose high quality. And then uncheck this because
if you leave this on, the file size will be unnecessarily
large and then you're basically saving
a footage of file because you'll be
able to go in and then edit the layers again. Okay, but we don't
want to do that. We want to just send
it to the printer. So we need to uncheck
this to reduce the file size and
then he save PDF. It's going to take
some time to see and now we have our PDF saved. So we can go back to our holder
and we can see our PDFF. Now we see 13 MB, right 13 M. So open it and this is our PDF
ready for printing. We can send this the printer
and we're going to get all the necessary details
we need for a print file. Now the next thing we'll
be looking at is how to save in GPE format for print. So you just come to file, and then simply go to
save us once more. You're going to choose GPE. You're going to choose this
particular GEC format, so click and then give
it a name, right? Color correction, so exercise
one, color correction. Let's just say V one,
serve as version one, and then you hit
C, and you are now brought to this place where
you can choose the quality. So you can choose low quality. If you want medium quality, high quality. Or maximum. I'll choose maximum
because for print, you really want to have the
maximum quality you can get. So this is all you
need to choose here. You don't need to worry
about any other stuff here. And then it's now saved in
our folder. Now we go back. You're going to
see it saved here. Now this is 8.7 M. No it's for saving PDF
and GPE for print. For some reason, sometimes, your photoshop
might not show you see format, some
of these formats. So it's just a very
simple thing to fix. All you need to do
is to go to edit, go to preferences, that if you're
experiencing that problem. If you're not seeing those
other PDF and GPE formats. All you don't need to do
is to go to preferences, and then go to file handling. Okay so go to file handling, and make sure Nib
legacy S is turned on. Okay. So if you turn this off, let's just see what's
going to happen. If we go to file, S
S, and come here, you're going to see that we
don't have those formats yet. So In order to bring
those formats back, you have to go to preferences, and then file handling, and then enable
legacy Cas, then ok. So go back. I mean
to see our formats. Our formats. Perfect. Now there are other ways we could export. We could export
by going to file, and then go to export
and export us. You can do this for GPE and PNG. And one other way you
could export PNG is to come to quick export SPNG, then you're just going to
save it and you're done. Now what's a PNG file? The PNG file is basically a file with a
transparent background. And you're not going to
really see the difference. If we save this as
PNG, for example, if let's just go in
and export SPNG. And then go to
projects first two, and let's see if this is PNG. Now you're not going
to see any difference. You're not going to
see any difference between DPNG and D
PNG. Let's open it. Sorry, this GPE and D PNG. This is GPE and this is PNG. You're not going to see
some more difference except for the file size. PNG files ally
have more details. The file sizes are
usually bigger than GPE, and you see this GPA is 8.75, or this page is 18.1. PNG usually carries
more details. That's why it's larger, but apart from
that, you will not see any difference
from the preview. That's because this image doesn't have a
transparent background. But let's just go to
file and open and go to the folder for export
from ADB, that's 04. Open the HF creation to Lugo. Now this is my Lugo, and we're just going
to see how exporting SPNG can help us have a
transparent background. Let's come here
and we see that we have the layers for the Lugo
mark and the Lugo text, and we have the
background layer. Let's just hide the
background layer so that we now have a
transparent background. Let's assume we want
to export this. As PNG so that we can
use it as a watermark. Again, we can use
it as a watermark. We could place it somewhere. Let's assume that's
what we want to do and then go to file export, quick export as
PNG, and then save. Now, if we go back
to our folder, we're going to see that
we've been able to export our file
with no background. We see that it has background. So it means if you see let's go back to
this, please and drag it. Drag our file down here, we're going to see that our file appears with no background. He, we can see that it's
basically has no background. So that's how to export PNG. Or that's what the
PNG file looks like. But if we export this as
GPE, see what's the happens. Let's see we want to
export this as GPA. And go to JPEG, where is MGP my GE. Let's assume we want
to export this as GPE. Let's just sill
export in the folder. Let's save as GPE, and ok. Now we can then see that O file was
given a background. You see, we had no background
initially in foot shop, but then we exported it as GPE, it was given a white background. So GPX cannot have a
transparent background. On the PNGs do have a
transparent background. That's one thing you
should take note of. Let's assume we want
to export for screens. We want to export so that we can interact with our design on the web and our smartphones on Instagram, and
so on and so forth. All you need to
do is go to file. Export. And by the
way, this also works. You can also use C
for this purpose, but you can go to
file to export us. And then we are now presented with a
preview of what we have. We can zoom in Zoom out. We can zoom in to
see the quality. Now the quality is high
and it's under PNG. So we can save PND, we can see GPD we can even s GIFs or we're not discovering that for
now. Let's choos GPD. As we review the file size, we will basically
see the PVew here. So let me just take it. We can see that our
image is losing pout, so you can see that
it peaks a little. So we can increase the quality
or reduce the quality. But if you're going to
use this on the website, you know that you want to
keep the file size as low as possible because
you don't want your page to take forever trying to load
the image, right? You might just want
to keep the file size as low as possible while meting on some quality. That if you're going to be
exporting it for a website. That's one thing
should take note of. Now you can actually
increase the resolution. Now we can see that it's
1x1x I we take it two x, it's going to be twice
the size of our image. It's going to be twice
the size of our image. Let's make this 100, and then we can choose
the image size. We can basically adjust the image size here.
That's the resolution. You go to adjust the image size, we can adjust the scale. We can reduce the image size by making it 33% and the current. We can see that even our size, that in Kb is reducing. The size of our
image is reducing, just by adjusting the
image size option here. So we can make it
bigger by choosing one x or rather by choosing one 50%, it's 150% bigger than
our current image. Keyboard lets ke it at 100. Then basically, that's
all you need to handle and then you can export open where
you want to see. The images let see it
a two, option two. Perfect. Let's try
exporting our PNG using the same walk f.
Export export us. Now let's choose PNG. Perfect, now we see
that we now have our transuent
background pattern. So we can do all of the settings here just like
how we did for the GPE, and we can hit
export. Then D one. Perfect. Now we've exported this SPN D also using
the same workflow. Now, there is one
more thing I want you to see when it
comes to exporting. Let's go to file and
set a new project. Now let's choose art boards. Let's hit k. Let's assume we
have multiple art boards. Okay, let's assume we
have multiple ad boards. Let's you know what, Let's delete this guy first. So I'm just sitting
delete on my keyboard, and let's make this pig bigger. Then bring in some images. So I want to bring in I want to bring in
my transparent logo. Perfect. And then I want to duplicate the file or the artboard and bring
in some other images. Let's bring this guy in. Let's make the image
big. Arrange it. Let's just go ahead and
work with these two files. Or these two artboards.
Let me just add one more. Second. Let me
just add one more. For this O want me
to add this image. I'm dragging into my out, and I'm scaling them. Now in order to scale
evenly like this, all the need to is to hold
down alt on the PC or option, I think on the mark,
so you can hold option on the ma or t on the PC. And then just s k it. It's going to scale
evenly and then. Now we have these three outs, which we want to exports. We have the three buts
which we want to export. All we need to do go to
file export and export us. Now let's wait for B photoshop
to load all the artworks. Now, we see that we have
all our artboards here. Here we have Art one,
but two but three. It's copying the names
of the artboards. If you want to change this name, we have to change it from here, so we can give it
a different name. Let me just give the
but a diera select. Sorry, come to your
Layers let's see go. We see it change here. Then for the second
one. Let's see. Family image, family then for the third one, Me mistake. Did that. Then for
the third one, we have shoe shoe image. Now I'm going to
go to file export. And we have our boats. We have our outputs
with our new names now. We see that our outputs
now have our new names. If you want to export all
of them, we can select all. If we don't want to
export all of them, we can just choose
the ones we want to select and basically effect the same changes we
effected when we saw how to export
using this work flu. We can pump up the image sizes or the quality of maybe just
make this six or five. Let's say we want
to just rat with them on on the Internet. That's for this image.
That's for this image. If you want to edit the options, we have to select the image. Can see that this
one still has PNG, so we tick it to GPEC, and then for image size,
we leave it at six. Sam also for this ones PNG, we can take it to GPE, Then image size leave it
at six and export. And go to our exports from ADB fda and
just select Folder, and ADB Ft Shop has
exported our files. When we go back, if we go back, we're going to see all our
aports perfectly exported. We can see all of our
files perfectly exported. Okay. So that's it for
exporting from poo shop. Cos we don't need to save. Thus this, we don't
need to save. We also close this, and we don't need to save
because we've worked on it. Perfect. So that'll be it for this video guy, see
you in the next one.
24. Module Introduction: In this module, you'll learn about ships in a Do B photoshop. You'll learn how to
create basic ships, how to create custom
and complex ships, and how to modify ships
all in a DB photoshop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue. Please, reach out to
me via message or in Q&A section if you
have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for
you. See you in the next.
25. Create Basic Shapes in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome back. In this video, we're going
to learn about ships. So what are ships? There are rectangles, spheres, or ellipses, triangles,
and so on and so forth. So we have very basic ships. We have custom ships, and we have complex ships. We're going to look
at all of this. But for this video, we're
going to focus on basic ships. So first of all,
go ahead and open a new projects if you don't
have a new project opened. I have my new project, and I'm just going to
go ahead and come here. You dug to be having
this triangle. Yours might be like this,
right? Push the four. I'm going to go to this place. You sees the rectangle two. The short code is, and I
need you to click and ho. If you click and hold,
you're going to see the different ships we can pi. Okay, we have the rectangle two, which enables us the
rectangle sp, the p two, which enables the p ship, the triangle two, the sig two, We're going to start
with the rectangle. Let's come and select
the rectangle. Then come to your works piece and And then click and drag. Just click and drag. Okay.
So as you click and drag, you see that you're able
to create a rectangle, so you can have it like
this. Can have it like this. You can have it
whatever way you want. If you want to create a
square that equals sites, all you need to do is hod
down shift while dragging. When I p down shift now, you see, it down locks my sits, and then be unskilled
even even together. So you see that we are no
log creating rectal goods, with different sites. We're creating square by
holding down shift on your PC, so you can release your mouse
when you are satisfied, when you are okay. Okay. Now when you create your ship, and you want to
move your sheep or you want your shipyard, go back to this move too. So always go back
to the move too. So we can select our sheep
and we can move our sheep. We are able to move our sheep. Because we selected
the move to you get. Right now, I just
want to come here and click on shoe
transform controls. If I click on shoe
transform controls, I don't see my
transform controls. On these transform controls, enable me to scale my ****. Okay. Now, right
I want to sk it, I don't need to hold down
shift to scal it even. So I can just click
on this side, then sk it up or down. If I hold down shift,
I will now be able to scal it unevenly. Yeah, I will be able to scale
it in an uneven manner. That's it about creating the rectangle When we
create our rectangle, let's assume we're still
in our rectangle shape. And now we want to
change the color. Here, now we have what
we call the feel. Here we have what
we call the stroke. On the fel is the
color inside our shap. If you click here, you change
the fiel, you click here, you change the stroke, and the stroke is
the color outside. Lets just come to the stroke and select fresh color here or
whatever color you have. You just to select it here. If you do not have
any recent colors, you can just come here to
RGP and then click on red, so that we have it
as our stroke color. We can now come here
for the stroke size, and then now as you see, we are then increasing the
stroke size of our guy here. Let me just teach
you how to modify the colors because there are
lots of ways to do that. Now, you are able to choose whether you want
to have no field color. You can see when I click this, I have no field color. When I click this,
I have a few color. So if you just go around, you should see now
you see new color, and then this one
has solid color. Now, solid color, you to
choose a solid color. Now it means you to
chos this color, this color but these
are solid colors. They are solid because they
contain just one color. Then if you click here, you to choose brilliant. Ingredients are
not solid colors. Ingredients have a blend
of two or more colors. For this one, we have a
blend of black and white. So you can change of course. You can do click and
change the color. Let's say we want to have green. And say new. Perfect. So you can see that we've
changed the gradient. For here, we can have a pattern as a field color
or as a field rather. We have a pattern. You
can edit the pattern, you can increase the scale, make it bigger, or
make it smaller. We can see the pattern. This be a forest, and this ps a forest,
and the are leaves. We can create
patterns with these. Perfect. We have
other categories, other categories of patterns, we have the grasses,
we have the water. You can actually add patterns. You can come here and
you can import patterns. You can import
patterns. These are just the default pattern. And you can of course
change the angle, patterns, and you can see
how weight is change here. Maybe we should
increase the size of bit to see how the
angles change. That's it for patterns. For gradients, like
I showed you before, you can change the color here, you can change the color. Here. Then we also have the gl. Let's ache the angle and you can see how
the angles change. That's g for the ingredients, and we have the
type of gradients, we have different
types of ingredients. We have the linear gradients, we have the radial gradients. We have the ingredients. We have the reflected gradients, we have diamond ingredients. This is just an introduction
for you to know. We're going to work with a lot of these things
as the cost progresses. We have method,
perpetual these things. That's too important. You can just explore
them for yourself. You have this thing
here where you can switch between
gradients, the position. If you click here,
this guy is to come here come here, of course, it doesn't show here here, but you just shoes on your
art work or on your ship. That's it for this. Apart from this, we can
actually choose custom colors. If you just come here and click, you can down to the custom
color for your shape select the guy and you
can see that we now have custom color
fill in our shape. Right? So that's just a brief
introduction into this. We have this place where
we can corte switches. Now, these are called switches. These are called switches.
We can porte switches. We can check other other
presets or other switches. These are pistol colors. These are lights, and then these are darks,
darker, and so on. Potential we are
arranging these things, and these ones are
called pale colors. In Illustrator, there are way more swatches,
really amazing. That's it for the feel color. Now, the stru color
has basically the same thing the f color. It's basically the same
thing. Only differences. You can adjust fifth size here of your stroke
or stroke size. Call it the stroke and
also the stroke options. We can have solid stroke, we could have d lines. We use this to see
the effects more. We have d lines, we
have smaller dashes, who have these other changes. I don't want to go to go into this so that you
don't get overwhelmed. But you can go ahead and
see the differences. You even have more options. Give more actions to
choose more presets. Now the most important
thing for it to know is fill color and
the stru color. Now that's it for now. Come here and create an ellipse. We have an ellipse shift, rag, we have an ellipse, and then we have
triangle perfect. Sorry, I created this in the
same layers, let me just do. The next thing is triangles, click, I'm plling
down one shift. Your triangles, we change this, increase the stroke size. K. Then have a polygon. You can create a polygon, you can choose the
side, a number of sits. Let's see we want to create
a polygon let this di first. Let's select the polygon to. Let's see we want the
polygon with six sits. Typing six, then
create a polygon. Let's we want to create
a polygon with 12 sits, typing 12, then
create a polygon. We can see how it works. Perfect. This we can select and then go back to
our tool and maybe modify our colors.
The little colors. Give this different color. Let me give this new. As you can see under
your layers panel, we see that each one
has its own layer. You can manipulate each
one as a single unit. Perfect. We have lines also. These are lines. We
can create lines. Lines. Lines only have strokes. You don't have fs. You can side the lines
only have strokes. The feel color is insignificant. You can see there is no
few that is changing. Basically, these
are what you should look at the next video, we'll to go a step further and see you in the
next video. Bye.
26. Create custom shapes in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome
back. In this video, we're going to be creating
custom sheets in photo shop. Go ahead and create
your new folder or rather your new file and
come here. Click and hold. And now we've looked
at rectangle to ellipse to triangle to
pull on to line two. Now let's look at custom Sp two. Click on Custom Shape two, and now you're able to
put in your colors. Let's select this
color. Let's select this color for fiel color, and let's select this
one for stop color. Let's maybe increase
the struc bits. It to f. Okay. Now, when you come here,
you're going to see sheep. So you click here, you're
going to see different sheeps. And there are even categories, even categories, you can click
here to make this bigger. Now I'm just going to
open these categories, so you see all the sheeps
within the categories. We have these categories
for wild animals. We have this one for leaf trees. We have this one for boots, we have this ones for flowers. Let's append default
once and see. When we append, we see that
we don't really get more. These are just the default ones. We need to append. But we can import ships. You can import ships,
allows to import, and you can see that the
format is custom ship C S. That's the format of ships. I'm just going to create
some of these custom ships. Click and Drag.
Now the rules for shifts are still maintained
for custom ships. So you can hold down shift to maintain what do you
call it, the size, the evenness of the size, so that your ship looks normal, and Let's go back and try to
create more custom ships. Let's create this guy. Okay. Click on your to. We
select another guy. Let's create this elephant. Perfect. Let's let's
look at a tree. Let's work with this tree. Perfect. This tree,
I think having a stroke on it don't
look too good. Let me just remove the stroke. That because there are
too many details here. Then let's try a boat.
Let's see this guy. Then finally, I think we
should just try a flower. We can have flowers
also. Perfect. No, that's how you create custom ships now
to be photo shop. And with this of contin
end of this video, see you in the next one. Bye.
27. Create compound and complex shapes in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hello in this one,
we're going to be creating complex and
compound sheeps, complex and compound sheeps. That's what we're
going to learn how to create in this video. There is one thing I skipped from the previous videos
or from the first video. That's one little feature. We have when creating sheeps
like the rectangle sheep or the square sheep or
some of these ones with sharp angles.
Like this one. One option there is to modify is the corners or the
radius of the corners. Now, let's just hover on it. I think there should be yeah, 96 set radius of
rounded corners. So we can set the radius
of rounded corners. It means if we increase
this, let's say to 24, we try to create our triangul we see that it
comes with rounded corners. It comes with rounded corners. Based on the value
we choose here. Okay. Let me just
pump this value to 40 and see what kind
of square create. Now, this kind of square
create with rounded corners. That's how to create designs or shapes with rounded corners. Perfect. That's
the little option, I forgot to add in. I was going to delete
this ones and faze our creation of complex
and compound sheeps. Now what are compound sheps? Let's s compound sheps. Compound chips have more
than one sheeps in them. So it means we can come and select can go two,
pick the tan go. And then while
selecting our near, come to this place, where
it says path opresion. So click here and now you
see different options. Now the current option
is to scret near. It means if you
click and create, we're going to be creating
a new layer each time. So you can see the layers
keep adding up, right? So I'm just going to
delete this here. Yes delete this one. Yes. So we have other options. We can choose other options. We can have this
selected and then come here and choose
combined sheep. It means if I click and delese, it's going to combine
my two sheeps. Now we have two sheeps
combined into one er. Two sheeps combined
into one layer. We can use the size and see if we want to do
even greater things. We can have our layer
selected and add No, no. The right option
wasn't selected. I'm just going to delete
this one and select my LR, select my rectangle and
then and select combine. It still combines our hips. Let's select a different
option and see what it does. Okay, let's select
subtract from ship. S. I wanted to create a new one and then
subtract it from this one. Let's just All right. So what you want to do is
select this guy first and then select your operation. Select the subtract, and
then now we can subtract. Get how it works now. You have
to select your tool first, and then select the operation, which is subtract and then
select your ship and sub. Get the point. If you subtract, you can still modify the sheep, which is inside the layer. One other thing I want
you to just learn, please is that if we
create a new sheep, for example, let's see
we want sub truck right. We just want to
create a new sheep. And we get to see
this little icons, I call them on each
of our corners. As far as the sheep
has a sharp angle, you get to see these things
on each of our corners. These things enable us to modify the curvature
of our angles. So we can see how we modifying the curvature of angles
just by doing this. Perfect. That's a very little
thing I want to assure you. I mean select my
ship, my second ship. And then select this
common go mode. Let's see intersect that
intersect sheep areas. I can just select this
guy and then click. And we can see that
it's going to just intersect the area
between the two sheps. So you can experiment with
the remaning options. I think that's only
one option re meaning. You can see we've been able to create this compound sheep, which we wouldn't have
been able to easily do it with our ship tools here. These are what I mean
by compound sheps. We are basically adding
multiple sheps together. Why selecting this guide them, you just try adding an ellipse. We have to first of all,
select your ellipse, select your mood, and then select the
layer, and subtract. You have to really
get the work flow very well in order
to achieve this. We have to first of all,
select your ellipse, select your mood, then
select the layer, and then. That's that. These are all we call
compound sheeps. Then we have one more thing, which are complex sheps. Now these are sheeps, you can create by using the pen tool. You can use the pen tool
to draw out sheeps. You can see that
presently some parts. You can see some parts.
That's why I'm not seeing any shook or any field. I'm just going to
delete the path and then tick my pen tool again. Now click here and click Ships. Here now we have our feel
color and show color. I'm just going to start
creating my sheep. Perfect. Now we can see this
is now a complex sheep, because I don't have
it under custom sheeps and I can't create
it with my sheep tools. This is my complex ship. The p in set the p tool, all you need to come
and create a point. A you then need to do is click and drag to
create a Cuff point, click and drag, the Cuff point, click and drag, get
click and drag. Now, if we do not want to
create the puff point, we can just click and
click, click and click. Let me see, we are
not creating points. We're creating points with sharp angles. You get to click. Now when you come to the
please, you started, you're going to see this
little icon appearing beneath the pen to asking
you to complete the sheep. You can complete the sheep. Now it's now a full sheep. So that's how the
pen tool works. Pen is a very simple and and important to,
simple, yet important. And we're going to
work with the pencil while this course progresses. Apart from the pencil, we
have the free form pen two. This free form pen to
helps us draw sheets, but without clicking and
clicking and clicking. We just need to click once and then draw the desired sheet, and it's going to just complete
this for us like this. J. That's all you
need to do with this. Perfect. And to get this. We have the Coviture Pain two. And the Covitur pin two is really similar to the
Covert tool in Atto. If you're familiar
with it. Now, all you need is to click
click and click. Now we have a cou, click and
click. Now we have a coup. So click, click,
click. We have a coup. Click, click, click, we
have a cough and click, have a co have a ship. That's how this works. But if you do not want to
have a cough, you can click, click, click, and let's see
double click. Double click. I'll click once. Double
click, double click, click, click, click,
and we're going to have these these points. So we can modify it if
you guys like this. Yeah. That's how the
curvature tool works. Now we're going to look at the remaining in the next video. This is just how we create
complex and compound shapes. Okay. That's star for this
video. S you in the next one. Bye.
28. Modifying your shape in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hello, and welcome back.
In this quick one, we're going to learn how
to modify our ships. Modifying our ship simply means turning a square
into something else, or turning a rectangle into something else or turning an ellipe into something else. Okay, or whatever ship, whatever ship really, turning it into something
else, modifying it. That's what I mean by
modifying our ships. So now I still have these
ones which I created. Now we're going to start
with some of the tools here. Like this one here.
Now we're going to look at add
anchor points two. So in this two, what
you're able to do, you're able to add an cle point. So what do I mean
by anchor points? An cho point is
basically the points. Sorry, Let me just
go into this two. This two called
direct selection to. Now, if you select the ship,
whatever ship you select, whether an ellipse or
a square or rectangle, you're going to have
points like this. Not me see and click the point. We have this guy here, this guy here, and these
guys are called handles. So this is an anchor point, and these are gle. These are handles. Okay. Now, this is an anchor point
and and this is an angle. And this is it's handle, okay. Now, we don't have another
handle here because we have this angle here,
which is sharp. So we have two handles when we have a
curved anchor point. Yet. So now what do we
do with the handles? The handles are used to modify
the curve of the sheep. So we are basically
modifying the sheep. Is the hundle. So you have turned from this
guy to this guy. So I am doing control Z for d and then
control Z or we do. Okay. So let's do
Control shave, for redo. So Control Z for undo
contrary shaves Z for redo. Okay. So I have been able
to modify just this point. From what we had before to this. Now, if you want to
select an anchor point, you have to use this two, which is a direct selection two. Now, you just select the tool and then come
on Markie Select. Now, this is what I mean
by by Markie select. You have to click and drag. Okay? You have to click and drag to reveal the
anchor points. Or you can just
click on the ship, and then all the
anchor points will be revealed, but to be in white. Whenever you select
one, it's going to be new color while the
others are in white. Now, let's tick this
path selection two. This part selection
to is similar to the dir selection to only that this part selection to is
used to move the entire path, the entire shape
in this move it. You move the entire shape. It's basically a move
tool for a path. That's just what this guy here is used for
that part selection. The di selection to is now used to select the entire shape, as you can see, we can
move the entire shape. We only select co points this. Every sap pass and co point, We matter the ship. Let's try creating that
we have the ships. Let's try creating a square. Okay. So this is a
square ship here. Let's create another one
without rounded edges. Without rounded edges. Zero, enter. Now, you see. We have
one with rounded edges. We have one without
rounded edges. Now when I select my direct selection
to in select the sky, you're going to see that we
have four anchor points. So these cho points, our makeup are square shape, so we can modify it. It's going to modifiers, this operation will
turn a life shape into a regular path. Continue. Yes. So we now we've turned it
from a life shape, which is square into
a regular path. So this is a regular path
because it's no longer square. So for shape like this, Sorry. For ships like this, we have more than four
anchor points, okay? Because what footage
shop does is, it creates anchor points here and here in order to
give us this care yet. So we can still select the
ones we want and edits. And yeah, we can even add Yeah, like we saw before, we
added anchor points, right? Like, for example, this
guy as an example. We added anchor points, right? You could add anchor points. You just come on it,
and you're going to see the plots under the penal. So you click and you see now we've added an anchor points. So you can select it. Click and select. So you see we've added
cho points, right? We modified our ship here. Perfect. And we could
remove cho points. And this is for removal
of ancho points. Means if you come and click on Acho points, it's
going to remove. It's going to be deleted. Click, delete, click deletes. 15. So we've seen how much
we've no modified this sap, we can't even recognize
our square anymore, but it's totally modified. So that's how to modify
your saps in photoshop. And we have one final two. Sorry, we have one
final two here, which is the convert points two. And these two enders convert a curved point into an angular point
or a square point. So, um, to select the sheep
and then select that two. Okay. So now you can just click and
you see that it's now converted into
an angular point. You get it's now
at a shop angle. So it's no longer
a curved sheep. And with this, we've come
to the end of our lecture on how to modify
our sheps in shop. So see you in the next one. Bye.
29. Exercise 4 – Using shapes in designs: Hello, there. Welcome back. In this video, we're going to start the process of creating our first poster
design in filter shop. Okay? And the processes
we're going to cover in this video will include adding image to our
poster design and then adding ***** to
our poster design. And then the next module,
which covers text. We're then going to add
texts to our poster design. So now, go ahead and
start a new project, and we're going to use it
by eight in we create. And then first things first, I want us to import our
image to put a file. You go to please embedded. Okay, and then we're
going to use this image. Color Correction five. Okay, to select the
image, and please Go. Now we have our image plast. I'm just going to
bring it up here. And let's make this
bigger, a bit bigger. Let's work with the
size for now. Okay. Now what we're going to
explore after this is kind of adding more details
to our poster design. Okay, or more beauty
to our poster design using ship layers. Using ships. So we're
going to start with our ct angle two
or with the g hap. We're going to pu the
direct angle like this. Okay. I'm just going to do
picker to go into the shape or the color
picker two rather, then go out to sample my colors, right now, I'm going to
choose this blue here. Click sample blue color. Click or let's see. Maybe make it a bit lighter. Okay. Then click Okay. Perfect. Now the next
thing I'll do is get my add ankle points to again and then just
add an ankle point here. Perfect. Now, I'll go back to my pen to my move to
and see whether got. Perfect. Now, I'll just take
my direct selection to, select it, and then M Key select here to select my ankle point. I'll just drag it down at this. K. Perfect. So drag it down and maybe check this one also and
bring it a bit lower. Perfect. Okay. Now, next thing is I'm
going to duplicate this guy. So we can click and drag here and release to
duplicate or we can do Control G. You can do Control
G on the PC to duplicate, and then I'm just going to
take the duplicate bits behind or one step behind
behind the main layer, and then use my keyboard
arrow keys to move this up. Move it up. Then come here, click here, change the color. Make it a brighter
blue. Perfect. Now, I can see that it
seems our ship has struck. So we don't want stroke here, so I select my rectangle
to remove the stroke. So I've removed the
stroke for this guy, we need the same thing for
this one. Remove the stroke. Perfect. Now for this one behind, we need to click
and make it bigger. Maybe tilt the bit to create some difference between it
and the one we copy it from. And we can tell the boot of them and move them a bit lower. Perfect. Perfect. Now we have our first we have
our image that the shoes, and then we have our
sheeps, 02 sheeps. Perfect. I want to make
this image a bit bigger. We adjusted a bit. Then. And yeah, I think
we're making progress. Now, the next thing I want
to do is add an ellipse. Come click and hole
and then select the ellipse to who down shifts. I'll just make a
perfect ellipse. Okay. And then for this ellipse, I'll just bring
it to this point. And then click here to change
the color, make it white. And it seems it do a stroke, so I'll remove the stroke because we don't want
any stroke for now. And guys, that's
something I actually forgot to teach you
from the previous ide. That's how to create a star. So star is a polygon. It's a polygon, just that it's
a special kind of polygon. So we have a special way of we have a slightly
special way of creating it, but it's still going to
be using the polygon too. Okay. So maybe this
size would do. So let's finish the shape. And now I want you to just
come here, come to file. Let's please embedded. Once more, please embedded. Right now, you have
to go to the folder. On the ships in dub
f to shop. Okay? So this module five, that's sheps in dub foot shop. We have this nike logo. Select the nike logo in place. Perfect. Now, we need to
just make it smaller, and then place it on top of
this white background here. Okay. So next thing will be to reduce opacity of these bits. Let's make this 86 so that we can slightly see
through our image. Now I want to just
do one thing here. I do not like the way the white is covering
the shoe, this much. I want to just move this
guy to the right hand side, make this guy smaller. M this guy smaller. Okay. Perfect. So this is good. But the problem here is we
have this, this empty spiece. We do not have this color
or as the background here, and it looks awkward.
It looks weird. So what I'll do is take
my eye dropper tool. So this eyedropper
tool is used to physically steal colors
or sample colors. So if I click here, let's if I click here, for example, you're going
to see this color sd here. You get click here, you're going to see
the color sed here. So this is our color
picker two, to. Whenever I pick my eyroper two and then and
then steal a color, we're going to have
it seved here. It's also going to be
sved on our switches. So if we take this guy, for example, and then come here, we're going to see that
our color has been sifted. So that's the eye
dropper tool for you. Now, I'll just
take my hip two or rather go back to
my i dropper two because I've not sampled
the mean color the color, I want to sample going
to sample this color. Okay. Then take my rectangu
and then remove the stroke. And then just click
here and drag. Next thing, I'll click
this guy and take him. Below our background. That's below our shoe
image background. Perfect. So this is what we have. So we have a clean blend. Okay, so the blend is perfect. So our logo here is not
covering our image too much. Okay. Perfect. Now we have this so far. And next thing I want to do is show you how
to create a star. Now we're going to come
here, to put guns. Then we're going
to use five sites, because of course, a
star has five sits. But the thing you're going to do now is come here under seconds. Then you're going to use what
we call this star ratio. So yours should be 100%. So whenever it's 100%
you create an ellipse. Sorry, pul gon. We're going to see that you
have actually a ply gun. You actually have a pul gun. But let me just delete
this guy now and then come and make this 50%. Let's make this 50% and then create white hooding down
shift, click and create. Now you see it's a
star I'm creating. That's just how to create
a star, very simple. I'm just going to make
the star white color. Perfect. So I'm just going to click and reduce the size of my star. And then I want to
modify my star. I want to make
this point longer. Come to my direct
selection to mark you select the anchor point and I'll just make it longer like this. Okay. Perfect. And then one final
thing I want to do is, maybe not final, but I want to duplicate my star shape to control J
or we drag and drop here. And then make this other shape
the second star smaller. That's holding down ls. Clicking and holding down
ls to even resize it. Get evenly resize and then close and then choose
undo the color. Let's choose this color instead. This is the color. I'm just going to arrange
the guy properly. Perfect. I select the both of
them and maybe make them smaller and adjust a position
like this and perfect. This is what we have now and one last thing I want
to do is I want to just create a rectangle just
at the bottom here. Maybe we're going to
add a text on it. That's it. This is just what
I want to achieve. Perfect. So I think we've made ite
some progress with this. In the next module,
we'll cover texts, and we're going to learn how
to add text to this poster. We're going to add text to this poster in the next module. So this will come to the end of this video and see
you in the next one. Now, you just want
to see your file, so control S. And
then s on the ships. So we have new poster.
You post the design. Okay. Perfect, so
safe, and okay. And with this who've
come to the end of this video, see you
in the next one.
30. Module Introduction: In this module, you learn
about texts in ADB Photoshop. You'll learn how to
create an edit text, how to create texts along paths, and how to distort texts using the text wrap features
in ADB photo shop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue. And please reach out to
me via message or in Q&A section if you
have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next red.
31. Create and Edit Text in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, welcome back.
In this video, we're going to learn
how to create and edit texts in how to be photo shop. So when it comes
to creating texts, we have two types of texts. Now, this is the tool
for creating texts. We have these two. So this is called the
horizontal type two. Now if you click and hold, you're going to see others. Okay. The vertical type two is just the direct opposite
of horizontal type two. While the horizontal type two
writes texts horizontally, vertical type two write
text est it vertically. So I'm going to click
the horizontal type two. C select that, and
then when you do that, you can come and just
click on your works piece. Now you're going to
see the text a here. Now this is a Dummy texts. So you can double click
and then edit your text. Let's see, hello one. Okay. So now we've
created this text. Now let's just change the color. So you have what we call
the character panel. Now this is the Carter panel. You get this is the
character panel, but this panel is ducked
into our properties panel. Okay? So let's just go to
windows, and then character. Click on character. Now we have the Carter panel on its own. Not under the properties panel. Now, this gives us more options. It gives us more options. Now why selecting the text? You can come here and click
and then change the color. You see the color
changing, right? You can change the color. Okay. So perfect and then click. We're going to come
back to this later on. I just want to show you
the types of texts. Now you see this is what
we call a point text. It's a point text. Now
when you create this, You can scale it up and kel it down using these
transform controls. And basically, all you
need to do, like I said, to be to create this
text is just select the texto and then
click and start typing. Now this allows
you to keep typing typing typing down
to infinity key. You don't get anywhere to stop. So you can just
stop whenever you feel the written word is needed, or you can hit enter
and then go to the next line and
continue typing. But this text is mostly
used for headings, okay? No for the body texts. Okay? So if you want
to create a body text, what you need is
called an a text. Now, all you need to do
is to click on your text too and then click and
hole and then drag. So you have to drag to the points or to the area which you want
your text to cover. So when you're satisfy
you now release, now you see that the
text covers this area. But I feel that the text size
is to or the phone sizes, too large, so I'm not
going to complete this and create another one. So select my text
to at this time, I want to reduce my phone size. So I'm going to take
it to 12 points, 12 points and then
click and drag. Now we see that we
have smaller texts, and then this is of course
a domi text, like I said. So we now have it
covering this size. Now, let's say we are
still on our text too, and we selected
the area you get. Now, if we increase this, we are not really
increasing the size of our text on like
what we had here. So this doesn't increase
the size of your text. I only increases or decreases
the size of the area. So you're just
modifying the area, which the text covers. Now you can select the text, you can just click, click here and drag
to select all texts, and then click on the font size and then use your mouse wheel to scroll up and down
in order to release, or in order to increase
or decrease the size. When you're okay, you
finish your text. And yeah, we now have our text. So if you do not have
the text tool selected, and you want to
increase the size without using the
font size option, you can just come and click here and and increase it like this. That's if you do not have the text tool
selected if you have the move tool selected
instead, perfect. That's one way you can also increase the size of this text. Yet. These are the two
main categories of texts. You have the point text, you have the area text
which covers an area. Okay. Now, in order to edit our text. Let's see, we want to
change the font style. We want to change the font size. We want to change the spacing, we want to change this,
we want to change that. Now this is where the cara
panel comes in handy. Now the cara panel comes
along with this one, which we call the
paragraph panel, and all of them
can be found here. You see the paragraph panels, this and the Carter
panel is this. Now you can remove them, and separate them,
or you can have them. Together like this. Now, the caracter panel or the paragraph panel
will of course help us align our text in the center or along the left hand side or
along the right hand side. We can also choose these
other styles of alignments. Okay. Now we don't need
to worry about this, but you can check
out what you do. Now, the main guy is this one.
That's the character pan. If you want to change the
font size or the font style, you have to select
the font or the text, then come here, bas
the font style. Click here and now you have
different font styles. Now you can go over them
one after the other. You use your mouse
wheel to scroll. Then no select a good one. Let me select this one.
It's called Carl t. It's a pre to use font for
noncommercial use. I don't think you have the text because I had to download it. I have to download it
and moly install it, so it's a custom phone. But it's a phone
style you can get on the Internet very easily. Just type the name and you have to download it
and then install it. Perfect. There are many
other phones you could try. You can let's try another one. Let's try another
one. Let's see. This one, you just selected. Let's try this one.
This is elephant. Mark you select them and
just move them this. Perfect. Now apart from the font style of
the font itself, we can change style
which it appears. Yet, now this is
regular. This is italic. You can see the difference. Now, it all depends
on the fonts. There are some fonts that
do not have the italic, there are some
fonts that have way more options here
to choose from. But this one only has the
regular and the italic. Then we have the font size. Now you can reduce the
font size by going down, by reducing this value or
increase increasing this value. And then we have this guy. This guy is the spec
in between each line. So now we have it as at two, but we can reduce it let's
use two and C. Now we see that the spec in
decreases, right? Now, let's just click here
and use the mouse scroll, and you see that the
space keeps increasing. The space in between
between the lines, keeps increasing because we are increasing the value here. Now in this other one, the space in between the characters. So you see when we take it
to 100, if we take it 100, you see that the speed between the characters gets reduced,
right? Gets smaller. So in five, we see
that the small space, and then we have this guy
This is what it does. It's not that useful,
in my opinion. Now we have this one which increases the
heights of our text. Yet, we can make our
text longer than it or shorter than
it is perfect. We have this one which increases the wideness or the
width of our text. We have this guy here which
of course, changes the color. We looked at it before. And we have all these
other options here. We have this guy
makes it ticker, this one makes it italic. Even if your text
doesn't have italic, this guy don't make it italic. We have this one
which does this, makes all the
characters up per keys. We have this guy which
makes the first one, all the first words, upper ks. Then we have this
one which does this, which makes the
character a superscript. Then we have this one which
makes it a subscript, and then this one
which underlines it, this one which crosses it. So I'll wait for this one
and see you in the next one. Bye.
32. Create Text along Path in Adobe Photoshop CC: He welcome back. In this video, we're going to learn something
very quick and simple, but it's very important. Now, that's how to
write texts on a path. That's how to write
texts on the path. I'm just going to
shift these guys here. Now, come here to your
pen to, click on pen to, and instead of ship, this time, choose path. So come here and then try to create something
that looks like this. Mustn't be look like mine. This will just do. And one funny thing
with parts is, they have a funny
way of behaving. Now you see, I've gone
back to my move to. Now, if this was a ship, after I select my move to
and click on my background, you'll see that it
gets the selected. Parts do not behave like that. Parts keep getting selected. And one thing is, parts do
not show up on the layers. So they did not show
up on the layers, so they are not layers. They didn't have a
layer of their own. So we can move them and malate them with our
path selection to. You see with this one,
you can move your path. And with this other one,
you can, of course, select the ankle points and
walk on the ankle points. In order to access our parts, in order to see were, you have to go to
your path panel. The path panel is just
after your channels panel. So this is layers,
this is channels. Now we have the path panel. Now we can see that a new
part has been created here. No, this is our path, and this is just how the path panel is. Ling very simple, very basic. So that's because
parts are basic. You get. One thing
we can do it part is right along a path. All you need to do is select your pen two or your type two. It's very simple,
guy, very simple. All you need to do is
to come to the point on your path where
you want your text to start, and then just click. If I want you to start here, I'm going to click here and see that you have our
text on our path. If I want to edit the size, I'll just increase the size. I can basically change
every other option here. If you want your text to
start from here, like I said, you click here, but if not, let's just undo this and see. If not, let's conc this. If not, let's say I want
it to start from here, or I need is to click here. So I just need to
click from the point where I want my text to start. I'll just click here so
that my text starts here. And then you can type
hello designers. Then select my text. Make this 48. Make this zero. Zero is two small make
this 25, 100. Perfect. This is basically how
to write on paths. Now if you are cut it, you can continue to work. Let's try creating another path. This time, I wanted to create
a love or the heart shape. Very simple heart
shape, very basic. So this just neat this part M curved. K. Perfect. So Let's see we
want to write on our path. All we need to do
is to self our pin two or rather our type tool. I keep changing this. I
keep confusing this for the p two type two text two to select our type
two and click here. Now we have our longer path. So that's how to create
your text on a path. And with this we come to
the end of our video, see you in the next video.
33. Text Wrap in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, in this video, we're going to learn a
few more things about texts before going ahead to
finish our poster design, which we started in
the last module. So we'll select your text too. And click to create
a point text. Now I want to just make
this zero and make this 60, maybe even make this bigger. Now the first thing
I want us to look at is the text menu, do this menu, the text
me or the type menu. Now there are lots of
advanced to here which are not meant for this level or which are not
meant for this cose. They are meant for
the advanced course. But there are lots of few
things I might want you to see. The first thing is probably
how to change your type or your text from a point text to a paragraph text or
an a text. Okay. This is a paragraph
text or a text. Remember, I said there
are two types of texts, we have the point text, and we have the
paragraph text, right? So if you create a point text
like this one, remember, create a point text
like this one, remember you can keep typing
for point text, right? So let's say you create a
point text like this one. Can actually convert this to a paragraph text. How do we do? Just come to type and then
convert to paragraph text, which is the symeting
as area text. It means income, and
now you do this. You're going to be
increasing the area, not the size of the text. You can just keep
typing and it's going to fill in our area. Get the point. That's how to convert from a point text
to a paragraph text. Now, this is a paragraph
text or an area text, and if you want to convert
it back to a point text, you just do the same thing with the file and convert
to point text. And now it's back
as a point text. There are other few things. And for example, we should learn how to
convert the orientation, right now, this is
horizontal reentation. We can changes to a
vertical orientation, and we have our text
looking at this. We get these little
things are possible, which the type menu. We just lost our text here, and just use my
keyboard direction keys to bring it. Frame. So we have other ones. Okay, we have
rasterized type er, so it turns our type
layer into a normal er. Now, this is what I
mean by normal layer. Turns our type layer into something like this,
into type in it. You get It means you
can have more control, but you lose your
editing capabilities, which come with the type two. That's what that option does. That's the option to rasterize your type and then we can
convert our text to sheeps. We have to just click and we now have sheps
instead of texts. We can use our
direct section two, in select anchor points and modify them. We now have sheeps. Get very powerful option here. You can see we've totally modified some of
these characters. Because we were able to
convert our text to ship sys contro converted
pa to our text. Let's look at one more option. We can convert our text
to a path to work path. That's also possible.
I was going to undo. And then now I'll just
delete this second word here so that I can make this
bigger and we can look at the last thing I
want you to learn, which is the text option. Perfect. Now, select your ship. I'd rather select your text, and then set type
to click inside. When you click inside, you're
going to see these options, right? You're going
to see these options. Now, remember, of course, this guy is for changing
your phone style. This guy is for changing these options of how
your phone appears, and then we have this one for changing your phone size again. Then these are the ones
are irrelevant for now. And we have this guy here. Now, when you click on this guy, we're going to see
all called text rub. Click on none. Let's
select this one. So this is what it does now. You can see it wraps our text in a certain we get
in a certain form. Distorts our text in
a certain profile. We have many other
ones to choose from. We have the c which does this. Then we have the upper
c which does this. Then we can choose whether it affects horizontally
or vertically. What we go vertically
and horizontally. Then we can choose the arc. We can choose the bulge. We can choose the shell. You can just
experiment with all of this to see what
you come up with. That's it for the text wrap. It allows us to modify
our texts in this way. In this video, we've
been able to cover the text wrap options and
we've been able to see some other advanced or a little
bit more advanced options under the text me. That will be it for this video. See you in the next one. Bye.
34. Exercise 5 - Adding Texts to our first poster design: Come back in this exercise. We're going to complete
the design which we started in our previous module. So we had begun creating this poster design from
our previous module, and we said at the
end of this module, we're going to use
the knowledge we acquire to finish up
this poster design. That's why adding text. So
we're going to just do that. That's a very quick
one. Now, I'll just go to the type two click. We're going to create the
point type or the point text. Click and we now
have our point text. And this is the heading, like I told you before, point text is very
suitable for heading. And this dummy text
like you know. And then secondly, we're going
to create our body text. That's the paragraph
text or the a text. Now, after selecting
my text two, and sing that text two, just go ahead and
adjust the phone size. So my phone size now has
been adjusted to 12 points. So I'm going to click and drag. And release. Now we see that this all caps
option is selected here. I don't want that. I'm
just going to select this. We now have our text
in small letters. So I'll just make this
bigger increase this to 14. This is perfect. Then maybe change
the color to white. Okay. I don't want
this to be black. I'm going to make this bold. Perfect. And basically, we
are almost done. Maybe we should just
give this a text rap. So select this guy text, give this arc. Let's see. So maybe won't work so let's
choose this arc opera. And I think this is
just perfect. Good. And yeah, we have our heading. Looking perfect. Now we can
just maybe edit the heading. Let's say, best men men's shoes. So it's more of a post design advertising
the shoes, right? Best men's shoes. And then we have this text. And yeah, let's just have some other text at
the bottom here. Let's select text to click. Let's see discount and soon. And give this e. I. Perfect. And then. I just want to create
more space here. What I'll do selective guy, selective guy down shift. Select my star to
or rather my star, the one inside, select
the one outside. Then I'll just e my keyboard direction
keys would downshift to move this upwards to bit
upwards or b to the top, and then move our
text to the top also. Move our body text, I'm going to give this centralized paragraph. This is perfect and for you. I'm going to give you due color. Perfect. And maybe we
should make this color a bit brighter because it's
on the blue background. And yeah, this looks perfect. I think one last
thing is missing. That's we need to align
our text to the middle. Select your text, go down, select the background by
holding down control, to set the text and
then hold on Control, and then select the background. And then just come up here
and click on this guy. It's going to align our
text to the middle. I'll do the same for this one. Select the guy hold on control, select the background,
and click here. Aligned our text. I'll do this for this last one. So one last thing I'll do
is just save our image. So come to file
Export, Export us. Or maybe I should just
receive us method, receive us, and then
save this as JP. And just go back to our funda. And yeah, this is
now our design. Looks absolutely incredible, absolutely stunning and simple. So this we've come to the end of our exercise and our video, and of course, our module. To see you in the next one. Bye.
35. Module Introduction: In this module, you'll
learn how to crop and straighten images
not to B Foot shop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue, and please reach out to me via message or in the Q&A section, if you have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
36. Cropping an image in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, in this
very short module, we're going to be
covering image cropping and image stretening. So these are very basic stuff, but also very important. So let's go ahead
and open to an click open and then go to the folder and crop
in and stretening, in the folder shop and
bring in these two images. Okay. So what's cropping? Coping basically
cut in your image. Okay? Maybe you have some
redundant or unneeded details, which you do not want to
be parts of your image. Or maybe you want
to print your image in a particular size. So you might need to
crop it to that size. So that's cropping for you. Now, this is the tool we use for copying.
This is the crop to. So when you just click the two, you are now given
this controls, right? This 12, three, four, five, six or nine controls, which you can use
to crop the image. When you select the crop too, we get this properties
bar changed, and there will we
have options that are related to cropping
an image, right? Now, when you come
here on the tio, you're going to see
different options. Now, tio, if you leave
it on the ratio, you'll be able to
crop this image to whatever shape or whatever
size you want to crop it freely get without
having any problems, so you can just crop and And let's see we want to have this image this
size or like this. We want to cop out these places. All these parts of the image. We can just do that and then
create k. And now we have cropped our image basically that with this crop option
with this ratio option. I'm just going to undo crobin. And then come and
try other options. Now, if you want to use particular width
and height sizes. You could use this, you
could use this option. And then you'll be required to type in the wits and the height, and now this is
the we the height. You can see the
height 768 pixels, and this one, 366 pixels. You could edit this
let's see we want this to the 800 pixels. Let's just see 1,000 pixels. We get so as you can see, we are basically crabbing
our image right. Now we can click. Now
we have our image cb. Perfect let's hit z, Ct. And w me back. Now, we also have
these other ones, which enable us cb
specific sizes. So we have one ratio
one, let me see. We have this one, which is four ratio three or
eight ratio ten. And so on and so forth. Now we have the ones which give us the ability to crop our
image to particular sizes. We have four by 5 " and 300 PPI. We have 8.5 by 11 "
and 300 PPI also. You see these are
different putts. Now, depending on what you want, let's see you have a
photographer and you want to print these images. Now these are
standard sizes based on normal printing for photography. This
could come handy. When you don't crab in, receive your image and go out of the crop tool and maybe
come back later on to crab another image
or to work on pots and maybe you want to use
the crop too the cropto. You need to come and
change this from your previously selected preset because it remembers
the selected preset. You have to take it back
to sue in order to have this free ability to
crave your image, if not, If not, you won't be able to
have this free ability to cove your images. So you have to always
take it back to ratio, then, you are not able to
cove your image like this. Now you see it's
not cove it freely because it's not is on this
let's take it back to ratio. When we take it back to
ratio, Sorry. Let's clear. Now, if we clear, if we take it back to ratio, we will need to clear
the previous dimensions. If not, it's going to
lock the dimensions. That's why I was having I was unable to still edit it freely, even after taking
it back to ratio. Now I've taken back to ratio, and I've cleared the locked dimensions
for height and wit. Right now I can now edit the
heights and wits freely. So that's that about robin. And we also have some other
features on the robin, which I want you to know. Now, apart from just
robin freely and robin with fixed sizes. We also have one thing, which is called delete crop pixels. Now, if you have
these delete crop pixels on, and you crop. For the shop is going to
delete the crop pixels. That's the uneted parts. So Pars like this
will not be deleted. Do okay, and then try
to move this layer. Let's say I unlock this layer. I'm trying to move it.
You can see that all of the parts have been
deleted again. So that's one other thing
you should take note of. Now Let's contro, contro con. Then let's check this guy. Let's check delete crop pixels. If this guy is unchecked and
we crave it, and finish. Now we're going to see
that we still have the other parts of our
image which we cropt. The needed part we still have, and we can just use
them later on if they need arise. Yeah. That's star for crabbing. Okay, let me just undo. I think there is one more thing
I need to show you before we go into stretening our image. Now the last thing
I need to show you is what we call content A. Let's just unlock our layer
here and choose our cro. Now we have what we
call the content. Let's say we want our
image to be bigger, we want to crop it like this. Presently, it's set to
front p which is default. If you do this, this is
what you just get the key. Well, let's assume we do that. We want to actually have fa shop feel the space for
us. You can do that. All we need to do is to come here and select
content of a few, and then do our curbing. Do our curbing now. You don't want to do too much. It shouldn't be this big because it's going
to start acting, so you can just make it this
big probably and then Click. Okay. The shop is
going to walk on our image and generate
the remaining parts. Now you can see how foto
shop has been able to generate the remaining
parts. Magically. That's for content AA field. Now in some images, you might not have this
perfect or this clean, but there are even
better ways to do that to do this content feeling. We're going to learn some of these other methods in
little videos of the case. We have our cpt image perfect. So this will come to the end of this video and in
the next video, we're going to work on streening our image to see you in
the next video. Bye.
37. How to Straighten an image in Adobe Photoshop CC: He will come back in this short video,
really short video. We're going to learn how
to strat in our image. Okay. So what do I mean
by streting our image. Let's go to this one. Now, if we have an image, it's a horizon, like this
one, just like this one. K. There is a possibility that we get who one
to be not straight. Just like what we have here. Let me just take my pen to
and draw and draw a line. Let me draw a line. Let
me draw a straight line. Click here and then we'll
on shift click here. So we can see that this
is a straight line a stroke color the fit. Okay. So we can see that
this is a street line. So our horizon is supposed
to be at least this street, we can see that the
horizon here is from here to here, so
it's not street. Et let's bring this
shape. To this place. So we can see that this
our image here is a bit better than this one, right? So what we want to do is we want to straighten this whoism. That's just what we want to do. I straighten this whoism. And we also use the
crop tool for this. So select the crop tool, and then she straighten.
Going to click. On treating, then you
have this kind of ul tool or this tool that looks like Ruler.
That's the crop. Tool converts to this ruler to all you need
to do is to click here and drag the line to the
end of the horizon. Okay. And you're going to get
photoshops treating your image. Okay. So remember we have
content a field, right? So we are going to ax photoshop. To fill in these other
empty places automatically. So if I just click this, we can see photo shop of magic, and let's see if the Shop does
a good job filling it in. So we can see Photo shop
did a really good job. A incredible job, in fact, by straightening our horizon and also by filling in the space. Now, let's see how street
our horizon is once more. Let's d row set line, click here down shift,
and click here. So we see that. We now have a street horizon all
thanks to Photo shop. That's not about
straightening your images. That's double
straightening your images. This one doesn't need
straightening really. But even if it did, we could still use our crop
tool and straighten it. Can just see from here
to here like this. Yeah, now it's treating it. And if we have contained
a few selected, we can click it and put the shop fills in
our image. Okay. That's that about sting our
images in Adobe pot show. And see you in the
next video. Bye.
38. Module Introduction: Learn about smart
objects and what they can be used for
in A B Photo shop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue. And please reach out
to me via message or in the QNE section if
you have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
39. Getting started with Smart Objects in Adobe Photoshop CC: Guys, welcome back.
In this video, we're going to learn about
smart objects in photo shop. So go ahead and
create a new project, and let's use our eight by
8 " preset. Set create. And now I just want you to
go ahead and open an image. So go to your folder
on smart objects, that 08 smart objects in AV photo shop and
select smart objects, select this image, this image of father and Duter and open. I'm going to bring my
image into this place. I'm going to click
and drag and drop. We can see that my
image is very large, way bigger than my work area. So what I'm going to do
is just scale it down. Now, I want you to
observe something now. I just want you to kind of
observe the quality here. We see that this image is
quite high in quality. It's quite high in quality. You can zoom in to
see for yourself. So I want us to scale
this image down, and not just scale it down, but really scale it down. I'm I'm going to pull down ts and scale my image
down to this please. So I just completed my scaling. And now let's select
our image once more. And maybe scale it even further. Okay. And then
select our image one more time and n scale
it to be bigger. Maybe not as big
as it was before. Just as big and click. Now you agree with me that
our images lost quality. In fact, our image has
totally been destroyed. We can't see the details. We can't we physically can't
use this image anymore. Now, what happened to our image? You see photoshop
the Pexel software. And when you scale images
or shapes or whatever, you're going to be
reducing the quality. You're going to be
reducing the quality just like what we saw here. So we can't use this
image any longer because our scaling has
reduced our quality. Maybe if we wanted to
use it in this size, maybe it can work, but we can't use it to the scale any longer. Because our images
totally lost the quality. Now that's what killing
can do to our images. And what's the solution to this? That's where smart
objects come in. Now, let's go back to
our smart object image, click and drag and drop. Okay. Now we have our image back, and I wanted to
just do one thing. Just come here, come
to the Las panel, right click and go to convert to smart object.
Convert the smart object. And you're going to see this little icon here
telling you that yeah, this is a smart object now.
This is a smart object. And what Smart object does is it's basically a
protective filter. That we put on our image to kind of protect
our image. You get. And basically protect our
image really from being affected by scaling by
the effect we add on it. So it means if we add effects to our image as a smart object, we can disable those effects
and see our real image. So it protects our image. So right now, biting my image. I'm just going to scale
it down once more. So I'm scaling it down, and we can see that I've scaled
it down to the same size or similar size to
the last image, so we can even see
the pixels, right? On the next now, do you select my image and scal it bag up. Boom. We can see that no
quality has been lost, so we didn't lose any
quality this time. We can see our image. In fact, maybe I
should do the scaling with the normal image so you see the difference
in real time. You have some me to
dive this guy control G or click and drag
into the new layer. Button. So now we're
working with this guy, and I'm going to right
click and rasterized layer. Okay. So Rasterize Layer is basically the opposite of
convert to smart object. So a layer like this, which
is not a smart object, which doesn't have the
smart object filter on it is called as talia, right? Rasta. Now, I'm going to
just hide this smart object, layer, and then skill
my raster down. Okay and then skill it back up. Perfect. Now we can see
the difference, right? I going to hide my mean the air. Now, you can see the
difference in real time. You can see the
defen in real time. Perfect. So that's what
Smart object does. That's one of the things that
Smart object does for us. What else can we do
with smart objects? Now, let's just ski this guy down and see one of the thing we can achieve with
smart objects. Okay. Now, I just want you to come
to the thumb nail and just double click on this
smart object thumbnail. Double click on it,
and it's going to open a copy of our image
with the name LR one. Now I'm just going to add
some graphic to our image. Let's take this two here, rectangle two and
this cate square. The. Let's give it the color. Let's give it this color. Let's create another one, HTA, maybe make
this one smaller. Create another one.
Maybe change the color. Let's give it this color, and we change this
color to green. So I'm just trying to
add these graphics to differentiate the original
image from this modified one. So what I'll do is
press Control S that's shortcut for C on my PC, and now I've just
seed this image. Now when I go back
to my guy here, we can see that these changes
with met have been audited. To our image that have
been omitted in our image. Now we can't select
them because they are a single image,
a whole image. But we can go back here and
make even more changes. Let's we change the
color of this one here, we make it maybe a little
bit transparent and save. Goba, which it has updated get. So that's one thing you
can do with smart objects. Smart objects are used
in graphics a lot. They are used in branding
materials like M coops. We're going to learn how to use more coops and even
create more coops. I think in a further
module in this course, but if we don't do
it in this course, we are doing it in
the advanced course. Okay. So that's
for Smart object. And one more thing about
smart objects is you can copy a vector file
or vector objection. I'm just going to
go to Illustrator, and I've opened this file, even though it's
not in your project funda not going to be included, but it's just for
demonstration purposes. So what I'll do now is
I'll select this graphic. Now, this is illustrator, and illustrator is
a vector software. Now, vector software
enables you to create graphics without losing quality. So no matter how much I
is zooming to this image, or this graphic or
this illustration, I will never see the pixels. I'll never see the pixels. So it's never pick the ts. I'll never do this
quality as far as it's a vector object. So I just selected
my drawing here or my my illustration here. Now, this is a project from a cousin Illustrator,
my cousin Illustrator. I'll just go to file or
other edit and copy. I've copied this guy here and go back to photo shop and pieced Ct V. We're going to
see this option here, which asks us to piste
it as either a layer. Now, if you piste as a layer, it's going to piste
it as a rasta lier, so it means it can lose quality. But we can piste it
as a smart object, and it's going to behave
like a smart object. We can piste it as a pixel, we can pit it as hiper as parts. We get so we don't
need all this. We just need to piste
it as a smart object. Okay. And now we see that this is our smart object
Tm nel once more. Y, it's a smart object now. We can sce it down. A. K. It's kill it up
without losing quality. So we never lose
quality because it is a vector layer
and a smart object. We can also do changes
to our layer here or to our vector object here
by double clicking here, again, we can double click. I' going to open the software or the program in
which it was created. In this case, that illustrator. This is illustrator let's just see I want to change
the color of this. Let me change the color
of this guy to C green. And also color of
this guy to C green. I'm going to hit controles. I will see this controles. Then go back to photo shop. Now we can see that our
updates have been made. So that's on smart objects. That's all you need to know
about smart objects for now. Okay. So with this we've come to the end of our video
on Smart objects. See you in the next one. Bye.
40. Module Introduction: In this module, you'll learn about layer styles
in Adobe photo shop. You'll learn about
the pebble and bos layer style, the shook, the inner blue, gradient of, and drop shadow layer styles. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue. And please reach out
to me via message or in the Q&D section if
you have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
41. Bevel and Emboss: Hey, guys, welcome back. We're going to start
learning about Lear styles. Let's start by creating
a new project, choose eight by eight presets,
create a new project. Now what are Lear styles? I don't need to define LA stays. We're going to see in a bit. I'm just going to create a text. I'm going to create design. Design. We're going to start learning about Lear
styles with our text here. Layer styles are basically
effects, I'll call them. They are basically
types of effects. We can add to our layers. G these to help our
layers look better. So I'm going to start
with what we call Bev and emboss. Bev and emboss. How do we get to
create layer styles? How do we get to
add layer styles? To our layers. Now there are different ways
of adding layer styles. And, so I have now created these two
graphic elements, right? So now to add our layer ts, there are a couple of ways. The first way is to come
here and click on the layer, right click, and then
go to blending options. So you go to blending options. It's going to open ear styles. These are the ear styles. And we're going to come back
in a bit and close you. And one other way
to open er styles, you can double click. Okay. D click on the er. Just come to this
part of the layer, this part, not the name, not the tom nail either. Just come to this part of
your layer and double click. And you're going to have
your layer styles again. Okay. And the last we I want to show you is
to come to effects. You see this please
where it says effects. Click it, and then you're
going to the blending options. So you can add blending options. Okay, so you can add
layer styles here, or you can just go ahead and add the specific layer
style we are adding. So we're going to start
with the Bevan en boss, click Bevan M bos and
going to open it. Okay. So you can as well use
these other methods to open and then come and
select Bevel an M bos. You get So what is
Beverly and Evos? Right? Benbos is a kind of layer style that
gives us a three D feel. Okay? Gives our layer
a three D field. Now, if you just added it, let me just close this
guy and zoom in a bit. I'm zooming in to see
my ship properly. So I've opened my layer styles and then click on vlan
embos we can see right now, it's turning to our layer to something that looks
close to a three D layer. Now we have options
here on the vela bs. We have the style, we have the technique,
we have the depth, we have the direction, the
side, we have the softness, we have the angle,
the altitude. Okay. We have the conor, that's the gloss conor. If you click here, you're
going to see them. Here, we have the
highlight mode. We have the shadow mode, all of these settings, and we can make a particular setting or a particular set of
settings, a default. Okay so that
whenever we open it, it's going to just apply that event emboss
effect automatically, that default setting, then
we can reset to the default. Now, this is the default. This is the default, right? Perfect. Now, let's
start with the depth. Let's start with
the size. I'm just going to increase
the slider here. Now, increase the slider. You'll see that our
t defect is becoming more glaring, becoming
more glaring. I can increase the size
and reduce the size. Now the maximum size
is the minimum size. I'll just leave it ne this, and then increase the depth. Now we can see that the
depth gives it more clarity. It makes it makes the effect, makes the effect clearer. Yeah. That's what the tape does, and then the direction chooses the direction of application. You get so we have
the up direction, we have the down direction. I can see in real time, how it affects our
effect, right? Good. So we have the softness. This will soften the
edges of our effect. Here we have the softness. Perfect. That's pvar
emboss for you. And we also have we have group. So this is at 90 degrees now. This is at 62 degrees, so we can just adjust the
group to get different effect. You get I like this angle. It is six degrees because of this subtle highlight on
top of our ship here. And it's making our
ship look like like a chocolate bar or god bar. K. We're going to work
on one project at the end of this module
with this bevel and bows. We're going to work on
a gold bar project. So we're going to be
creating a gold bar. Now, we don't want
it to be salt, we just want it to be zeroed, and now we can enable
glubal lights. Now you see the effect. We can disable global light. Then the altitude,
let's make this 100. See. We can see the altitude. It's supposed to be 90-0. Let's make this zero. Let's make this 90. We can see that IA, my altitude, our
highlight also spreads. The highlight, we just got here, the St highlight we got here. I'm just going to make this 61. Perfect. Now we have
the gloss contro, and we're going to go
through them so that you see the different effects can get you can see that this
gives us this effect, this gives us this effect. This gives us. You can go clear around with the
settings and see what you get. Perfect. I leave it at this. If you click here, you can actually
edit your mapping. That's the mapping for
your gloss control. If I click here, just
like the curves. This one we looked at when
covering color correction. So you can basically
manipulate this just the way you manipulate
your c, cs effect. That's basically, you
can just add points and see different effects
you come up with. We can also choose presets,
we have the linear, you have the C. We
have the inverted. That's it for this one for
editing your control map. We have the highlight mode. Now, these are basically the modes in which your highlight
blends with your layer. Now your highlights
are the whites. The highlights are the white. Now, I change, the
highlight color, you can see that the
white part is changing, that this really subtle white pd that's the highlight you get. This blend mode, even though we've not
looked at blending modes, which we are definitely
going to look at in details. This blends are
highlight to our layer. You can change the
blending mode. Let's see darker we see
what darken does, multiply. But we don't want it to be that. Yeah, so it was in screen. Then this one was in screen, and then this one is
multiply. We get. So we are definitely going to
learn about blending moods, and you're going
to understand this whole thing better when we do. But for now, you just want
to keep this as screen, and then keep this as multiply. And then when you
lower the opacity, we see that the white
disappears, right? Increase, we see that the white becomes more and more glaring. And so also with the
black or with the blacks. So 50 will do. Sem also 50. Of course, this place is where you can change the color
of your highlight. Maybe you want your
highlight a little bit closer to the red, do this. It's going to give
you that effect. But we don't want that. I
Sem also with the shadow. But we don't want
that. And finally, about the styles, we
can change the style. And this is just where
you get with the styles. You can choose outer bevel. It's going to bev outwardly. We have inner bevel,
we have embers. We have pillow embos and just
click with the settings, and we have the technique, we have the smooth,
we have the chisel. So we get this really sharp look with the chisel.
Really sharp look. We might want to increase our opacity or the white
so that choose more, and we might want to
change our blending Rather our gloss contro. Okay. Perfect. So now this
looks just like gold bar. You agree with it
looks just like G bar. We also have this guy here, it's called the texture,
I'm sorry, the conto. And this conto add this effect. You can see what it does, right? We are able to
choose other contos. It adds more detailing
to our conto. Look at what we get. Perfect. We can
increase the range, reduce the range, you see what we have been
able to come up with. And we also have this
which it's called texture. So it adds texture
to our object. Now there are lots of textures. They're just similar to the
textures we saw when looking at fields and strokes,
that's on the saps. So you can as well access all these other textures and
you can add your texture. You can put textures. But I don't want
to add textures. Maybe I should just
kill it down so you see what it does here. Perfect. Check conto
on check texture. This is just what
we want to have. Perfect. Now, let's try adding
our v to this guy here. But what we want
to do now is copy this bevel effect onto our text. We don't want to just
add it directly. We want to just copy this guy. What we do is s the right click, and then come here
it says copy style. Copy Ler style, and
then come here right click and pi er style. Now, this doesn't work on texts. It seems it doesn't
work on text, but it works on other objects. So we can right click
and piece layer style. It doesn't work on text,
it works on sheeps. Well we can still add
layer styles here, we can just click. I'll go ahead and add it
to here to Pevlar embers. Here, we have our pavilar embers and it remember our settings, so we didn't lose anything
by not being able to copy. We can see that it
basically looks like this. Let's just try to adjust some
settings, some properties. Let's reduce the size so we can see what we
get with the size. If the size is too much or
to the maximum, we get this. And this one the size
is little or small. Perfect. Physically,
that's that's where you get with Pebb. I'll just add a little
something to this one. I just want to change the color. I want to make it softer
softer. Increase the softness. We don't just have the
sharp edges all over. Okay, so this will
come to the end of our lecture on Bevel and Emboss. See you in the next video. Bye bye. Y.
42. Stroke: Hey, welcome back in this video. We're going to cover
the stroke Letile. So I've gone ahead and see
this little project of S in the Lee Ttiles
project folder. So you can have access to it, and I'm just going to click
here and hold down Alt. Click on my guy and drug. Why holding down ****? What I've been able
to do is duplicate it by just clicking, hoding down Alt and drag. Yeah. If you click Alt and drug, you're going to
duplicate your Lia. So we're going to experiment layer styles with this guy here. So while selecting it, double click to go into
the layer styles mode. Okay. So this is stroke. I've just applied my stroke. You can see that the entire
color changed, right? And that's not supposed
to happen strok, but I worked with stroke earlier on and shop
remembered my settings. So what I would just to come
to this layer or sorry size, the stroke size and
reduce the stroke size. So we can see what we now have. And the reason why we're having our stroke inside our text is because it's selected
here, so have it inside. So we want to have
it outside for now. We also probably be like this. We can increase the size of our stroke and you
can see what we get. You can choose a blending mood. Like I said before, we
don't need to stress about blending moods for
now because we have a whole module on
blending moods. Again, this is the
position of your strop. You can make it outside, your sheep, you can make
it inside your sheep, or you can make it in the
center of your sheep, so it's going to be between inside and outside physically. But I want to keep it outside. Then we have what we call the co feel or the feel
type, not color. Right now it's said to color. That's why we can
click here and change the color to what we want. Then we can make this default. It's going to remember the settings and make the
settings, the default setting. Whenever we want
to add the stroke, it's going to just
remember this settings as our default
settings or you can reset this to the
default settings that came with photo shop. You can actually choose
other field types. We have the gradient field, and it basically fills
our stroke with gradient. We can reduce the size. We reduce the size to click here to edit our gradient
add presets. What we looked at
gradient preset and we're looking at
ingredients that shape. So we can choose
Multiple presets, or we can choose preset we want, and we can even edit our preset. Let's say we want to edit the
colors, we can click here, or click there and then
change the color or click, and then click here, and then change the color. We can add colors by
coming here and just click coming here and that clicking if we
change the color to this, then come here and
click, change the color. To this. And click. Perfect. We have what we call opacity and you definitely
know what opacity is. These are the opacity handles. If you click here, you
to change the opacity of the colors of your gradient
from here to here. Let's say this is zero. We're going to see our
colors flowing 100-0. Get and you can add more opacity handles by just clicking here
and clicking in. Basically, that's
it for ingredients, and you can add patterns
in that pattern. Let's just look at some of these other ingredient options here. You can reverse
your ingredients, You can change the direction
or the angle of ingredient. You can reduce the scale
or increase the scale, non scale is basically the blending between
colors, how well the blend. If you make the scale smaller, you're going to see that
the blending isn't much. But if you make the scale, 100, you see that it blends well. That's just it for green fiel. We have the patterns, and
it's basically like patterns, which we looked at
in the last video and in other videos before it, we don't have to
stress about this. Now there's one other
thing we would do. Two strokes, go
into strokes again. And one thing we
can do is we can add a stroke on top or stroke. So just click on stroke and
then where you see this plus, just click it, and now
we have a second stroke. Now this guy is the one on top and this guy
is the one below, just like how the layers
can be structured. So we have layers of strokes. So it means this one is going to show first before this guy. So we could just let
this guy make it bigger so that it appears
behind the one in front. So when I change, the color. You see that it appears behind
the first stroke, right? So I don't want to change
this to gradient two, but maybe different gradient, maybe blue, maybe you want to
this rests on the blues and then have this guy
to be on the reds. That's the way to add
multiple gradients to layer, and there is one way to
copy between layers, that's a copy effects
between layers. I showed you the
first way before, one way to do it is to just
come to the layer or come to the layer here
and then come to the effect and then pull do ts. On your keyboard, and then
click your mouse or let's click your mouse and drag it to the new layer you want
it and then release. We can see that
copy this guy here. That's the one outside, the shook outside
to our layer here. Yeah. That's basically how to copy or that's basically another way to copy
your layer style. That's that for our stroks. In the next video,
we're going to look at the inner blue layer styles.
See you in the next one.
43. Inner glow: Hello, and welcome
back. And this one, we're learning about the
inner glue Lia style. So I'll just duplicate my
lia here or my ship here. Dupate my ship, bring it down while hooting down shift
and then zoom in a bit. Perfect. Now, to clicker and add the inner
glue layer style. Now, this is the inner glue, and you probably do not
see any change, but just crank up your
opacity to maybe at, and then your size, you're going to start
seeing the change. It basically adds a glue to
the inside of our shape. Now we have a couple
of other options. We have the blending mode. K. Let's make this lighter
lighten or screen. Or just normal because we are going to look at blending
modes in a further module. Then we have opacity. Opacity, of course,
you know what it does reduces the visibility
of our effect, of the noise, we can increase the noise, and you
can see what we get. It adds noise to our blue. We have the method. We could choose this or choose this to the
perpetual method, and this is the linear
and that and that you could just experiment with
this to see what you get. We can change the
color. Maybe you want your blue to be bit
to the red side. We just adjust the
color like this. Then we have these
other settings, but I'm not going to look
at every other setting. I'm going to just adjust
the size and the choke. We see this what they do. Success with most of this
effect basically comes with you just going in and gaining
experience for yourself. So just going adjust the settings to see
what you come up with. So we have the size,
we have the choke, and I'm just going
to use the noise so we see the effective
more clearly. Now we can the size. My believe it. This pig. Then now we have the contos similar to the contos
we have on the Bb. So they give us this
really cool looks. Basically, guys, that's it for the inner glue.
That's what it does. I adds glue to the
inside of our shape. We also have the outer glue, which does the opposite, which adds the glue to
the outside of our shape, and it's basically
the same thing, basically the same thing. The outer glue
will not show here unless I give it lack
backgrounds to this. Select wanted creating a newer. Lets create newer, then
give this er lack. Then bring this
layer blue layer. Now, if we add an outer glue, we are going to
see what it does. I'm going to see the effect. Now these are outer glue, right. Now we need to
crank up the size, and we can see what we get. Perfect. That's just it for
inner glue and outer glue. These are really simple effects. I'm just going to
delete this one we used and let's leave
this over the te. We've come to the end of our
video on the inner glue, see you in the next one. Bye.
44. Gradient Overlay: Hey, guys welcome
back and this one, we'll be learning about
the gradient of a knee. OG, so it's a really simple one. What does the gradient
of a knee do? Basically the gradient
added to our knee. So this is the gradient
of a knee, effect. Edent now, you can see that our layer turns to
having a gradient field. Now, I'm just going to
cheer the color so that you see even clearly. Whatever color we
have on our ship or whatever pattern we have or
whatever we have, basically, if we add the predent we're going to have
it replaced with a gradient over and then
we can choose a preset. And edit our preset. The same way we edited
this gradient field, which is here, which we
used for this design type. We can make the scale lower. We should show our demarcation, our color demarcations
very well, and blend it by
making our scale. And we also have the tan or the angle. Like we saw before. We have the blending
mood, which of course, we're going to look
at further module, we have the opacity. Now, the opacity blends, it blends the gradient or the gradient of with
our original color. As I reduce vpacity, we see that we are getting
more and more of red, more and more of red,
and make it zero, we see that everything
turns to red, or main keys because we
have reduced opacity. We can reverse our gradient of. We can align with layer. We see the effect it gives us. And method, we have the classic, we have the the
linear perpetual. And then we also have the
style. We also have the style. Now we can choose the
linear brilliant. Now this is the
linear brilliant. Basically gives
us a linear blend from one color to the other, and we also have other ones. We have the radial
gives us this then we can as get reposite
arrangement of colors, and we have g it gives us this. We have sorry, We have the reflected
and we have the diamond. So you can just go ahead and experiment
with these options and see what you get that
start about the ally, and I'm just going to add
the buns. The color over. Cool overly replaces our
color with another color. It means if you have, let's
see graphic that has a color. Let's say you imported a Logo. Let's say we imported Logo now. Let's just try this. Let's
go ahead and import a Log. Let's open and report
that kig we used. That will be let's
see on the text. Let's check text. No, we
on the shapes, I think. Yeah. So that's the nike logo. You could have a logo like this. Now, I was going to it here. This is our nike logo. And like you know, this logo we can just click
here and add a color, because this is raster. So it's like a normal layer
here, just like this. We can click here
and add the color. But we can add a color over me. Color of logo and will change
the color of our logo. You can see we've changed
our logo to red Nike logo. Perfect. So that's what
the color over a does, and we can also add the gradient of lead to our nike logo. Let's add the gradient of a. Let's physically hide our color. Okay. Perfect. So
you see we've added the gradient over and the color
of lead to our nike logo. I just put the effect to this
layer, that the mistake. That's it for these guys. As you can see here,
we can add more. We can add an extra ingredient. We add an extra ingredient, we blend blend the two
gradient together. So that'll be it for this guy this guy let's just
keep the nine t logo in the project file and hit control and see you
in the next one. Bye.
45. Drop Shadow: Hello, welcome back in this one. We're going to learn how
to apply drop shadows. Okay. I'm going to
select my layer one, which is my Nike logo, which has a gradient
over y applied on it. P down old, click and drag to the right hand side
while holding down shift. So that I duplicate it to the right hand
side on street line. Now, select my guy here, then go into layer styles. I can do click, we can use here. We can use this option to just
add drop shadow. Perfect. Now this is our
drop shadow effect. And as you can see, we can add extra drop shadows on
top of drop shadows, or behind our drop shadows. So first of all, let's
look at the options. Now, select my drop shadow. We can see the blending mode, we can see the color
of our drop shadow. Now we can change all of this. We can change the opacity
of our drop shadow. We can change the angle, drop shadow N. If you
change the angle, it affects the angle of every other effect which
you add here. Okay. It affects the angle of
the peblan and boss. So maybe we should just
use this particular angle. 94 or let's say 90 90 fault. So we can use 90 and then
we have the distance. Now look what happens when
I bump up the distance. This is my distance, and we
can see that there is now a distance between our drop
shadow and our nine k logo. We can increase the spread
to make ET spread bigger. Then we have the size, which will increase the
softness of our drop shadow. It increases the softness of
our drop shadow. Perfect. So we can see what
these sliders do, or what these options do. We also have the conto here, so we can also edit the conto of our drop
shadows and we can get some really cool effects
with these contours. I really cool effects. The best part of it is, you can add multiple
drop shadows. We have the first one,
we have the second one. For this one, we make the
distance even even farther, maybe the size
bigger or smaller. Depends on what you want to achieve. We also have the noise. I didn't check this. We have the noise, which will us to add noise to
our drop shadow. K. You can see we've been able to add multiple
drop shadows. And just like we saw in
the Bevel and emboss, we can also edit the conto
map of our effect here. The conto map effect to
we change this color. Look this here that's
is for our drop shadow. I want to show you
one more thing we can do to our effects. Now, while selecting
our guy here, just come to your effect,
just click on your effect. Click on your effect.
Let me click on drop shado effect.
Now we see options. We see options on
these options like this one shoos us which
effects are applied. So we have the gradient of
only, we have the drop shadow, and then we can copy, we can paste, we can clear. So these are really
simple things which we have looked at
in previous videos, but we didn't look
at this guy here. Now, this guy create layers. Now, if I click create layers, you're going to ask
me some aspects of the effects cannot be
reproduced with layers. So what this does is, it physically
reproduces the effects on layer. So we can click. Now we have our
effect on the layer. Now we can see that
some of these can get confusing for
you because we've not covered clipping masks. But what it did what
footsop did this, it basically clip masked this
gradient layer to the logo. And then added these
other ones below. Now, these are the layers
for our drop shadow. Okay. So I'm going to just
do a simple one so, you see, so I'm just going to do this
to have our effects back. I'll just maybe select
everything here, sk them down so that we have This, right? I'm just going to copy this guy pulling
down ks and drag in. And I'll remove
the gradient field because it's the gradient
that makes it click mask, but we don't want
the gradent field, so I'll I'll check
the gredent field. And so I'm going to work
with the drop shadows. So right click on the effect and then
create layers and ok. So now we have this guy. We have this guy, which
is our main Lugo layer. Then we have this
guy on top here, which is the shadow layer. Get to the shadow layer, the first shadow, and
then the second shadow. When you do that,
you're going to see this little icon here telling you that this
has been done to the layers or telling you
that the layers have been got from this little
effect we just apply. Or this little technique
we just applied to separate the
effects from layer. Now with this, it
gives us more control. Let's hide this guy,
work with this one. Now we can resize
our drop shadow, so we see that we are physically reciting our drop shadow. We're definitely going
to look at how to use this particular technique to
create realistic effects. Effects that look more realistic than what
we get on a default. Okay. So for example, let me just give you an
example of what I mean. Let's say we add a drop shadow. We have a drop shadow added. Let's just use
this normal contro and this normal conto here. Perfect. Maybe we want to
just bring down the size. And maybe reduce the
opacity perfect. Now we have this drop shadow, and we might want to achieve something more
realistic than this. Let's see the light
is coming from top. If the light is coming from top, the drop shadow will be
casted on the ground. A. If we want to create
something like that, all we need to do is see
create a We might then need to distort this drop shadow
and move it in such a way that it's going to
look more realistic. Now, I haven't taught you how to do these kinds
of distortions. I'm using my shift key and using my earth key to do
some of these things, but you don't need to follow along because we're going
to cover distortions. So we're going to cover how to do some of these
distortions that help you achieve
realistic looking shadows and realistic looking effects. Like this. We can't achieve this with the
normal drop shado. But when we manipulate
our drop shade further, we're going to be
able to achieve this. Okay. So I'll just delete this guy and save
everything else. So we can receive. This
file will be attached, so you can go ahead and
see for yourself what we've been able
to create and see how the layers
have been made up. Yeah, that will be
for this video, see you in the next one.
46. Exercise 6 – Write your name on gold: I'll come back and this exercise really interesting
exercise, by the way. We are going to be
creating our names on god. We're going to be
creating a gold bar and writing our
names or whatever, you want to write on it, and it's going to be kind of
inscribed into the good bar. Let's quit talking
and start creating. Go create a new file. I want ad boards, create. Then first things first is
come and create our gold bar. This will be our gold bar. Just the size and
currently white color. We're going to give
you the gold color. On gold is between
yellow and brown. O gold color should
be similar to this. Perfect. We can use
this as our god color. Now, just come and give this
Peble and embosser style. For style, you want
to leave it at inner B and then for technique. Let's just give it a artist. But we can experiment with other options to
see what we get. For the direction, we
want to leave it up. And then for this
one now for depth, this is where we get to define how big or how large
our good bar is now. I'm not getting to
see what we have, maybe we will just
change this for now. Key depth isn't showing
us how large, really. It's actually showing
us how sharp or how defined our good bar is. So let me increase
the size so we can see how large
our good bar is. So for size, Yeah,
98 is perfect. A, and for softness, we don't want this to be soft. We just want this to be at zero. And for the angle, we're going to
experiment with this to see which angle is best, right? Let's just tick it. Let's tick it. L et's take it even as low as C one
degrees or zero degrees. So now, we have minus
ten minus nine. Let's just work with
minus nine or now. And we only use global
colors for the altitude. Let's see what the
40s or 50s give us. Let's see, 48 now we want
to change our lost control. We only use this one is
cool. Let's see this one. This one is also cool. For now, let's experiment
with this one. Maybe we'll look at
other ones literal and then just boost up our opacity, maybe not this much. Maybe 257. Then for
this one, 50 will do. Basically, I think we can now add a conto.
Let's add conto. Now, for contour, We can leave a
control like this, but this doesn't look like
an ideal ba because yeah, it just doesn't look
like an ideal pa. Let's try ones.
Let's see this guy. Okay, I'm starting
to get what I want. Let me reuse this contro. Okay, so I like what
I've got here gives us this really cool looking
detail here on top. And yeah, I want
to work with that maybe just make that
a little bit smaller. And for now, I think
I like what we have. Ja, I'm just going to click, and then go ahead
to create our text. Just take your text to click here and type in what you want. For me, I changed my mind. I'm just going to type gold. Or you can write whatever
thing you want to write. Gold for me will do just well. Then you want to change
the color to this color, sample the bagra color
and maybe take it up a b, make it a little brighter, just a bit, and then click. Perfect. The next thing we'll do
is create our layer tile. We are going to
add a B and boss. As you can see, it
remember our settings. But we don't want to use
the settings, of course. Inner B will still be perfect
for this and then chesel. We want to turn
this chesel had to smooths smooth so do and then we want to really
reduce the depth here. You want to really
reduce the depth. One, we just do or two. Because I pressed
on my keyboard. Everything just closed. So you want to go back and continue ad trusting
other settings. Now, as you can see,
my sizing is already giving that kind of
inscribed effect. Now as I include the sizing, include the sizing, you can see that we're already getting that. So Let's ok to this
and zooming to see if you want to
add other things. Select your guy and go back. Let's look at other things. Let's reduce the opacity
of our highlight. Now as we reduce the
opacity of our highlight, we see that the effect
becomes more realistic. We want to just it. We
don't want to make it too. We don't want to
make it too little. It's not going to look real. This is also good. This is good. Perfect. I just want to duplicate
my good and just have few more variations to
my evolin in both settings. For this guy, I'm going to go in and try to maybe change
the conto a bit, maybe give it this conto. Okay. Then maybe the
highlights and the shadows, I think this will
do for the shadows. And then, Let's see. Let me zoom in to see I pulling down old and using
my mouse to zoom in. So we can see that they give
us two different effects. But all of these
effects are kind of cutting into a good bar. Cut it into a good ba. This will do. Since I'm
trying to create variation, let me also create one
variation for one go ba. So we come to contro a
different conto. Let's see. Let's chose a different control. So this contro gives
us nice details, too. Let's try another one. No. I like this one because it gives us that
kind of smoothness. That kind of smoothing
effect you see here. Mix this kind of plane. Get to mix our good but
moalistic. Good but mealistic. So maybe we want to do it
this much and then enter. Yeah. That's it, guys. We've been able to write
our names on good and you can go ahead and change
the text if you want. And our effects will be applied. So I'll just undo this school S for S. Then come to my Myers in Ado fda and maybe give this the name ba and S Perfect. And with this have come to
the end of our exercise, see you in the next video. Bye.
47. Exercise 7 – Add Layer styles to Poster Design: Hey, welcome back.
In this exercise, we are going to be
adding layer styles to our poster design. Now, we've been creating this poster design,
this particular one. So we started from
our module on ships. So we created we added
ships to our poster design, we added the logo,
we added the image. And then on our module on texts, we added the text, right? So in this video exercise, we're going to be adding
some layer styles to our poster design. So go ahead and open
your poster design. And now go to the layer
styles in Ad B Photo shop. Folder, and then you're going
to see new posted design. So you open new posted design. I'm just going to have a copy of this so that when you come, you're going to have one that we haven't added the near styles to because I'm going to
see this when I add it. Okay. So let's am it. New posted design, no styles. No styles. So you can come and
get them new styles. Now we're going to use this one to practice how to add styles. So we're going to use this
guy to practice open. Perfect. Now, there are a
few things we can do here. We could just add a
stroke to this guy. So best men's shoes to come
here and add a stroke. Perfect. We see that we
still have it inside. This time, Let's
just choose outside. Let's reduce the size. Let's change the color. Let's give it this white color. White color wouldn't walk. Let's give it this color. Give this sheet of blue so that it doesn't blend
with the background, but it still stands out. If we want it, we can
chose a gradient, maybe we should
choose ingredient. Let's choose the predent.
Let's give this ingredients, one of these
ingredients. This color. And then the other
one. Let's give it say this color. Then maybe I just want to make this color darker. Darker blue. Perfect. Perfect. Maybe
increase the ski and the size, and we have the opacity, we could reduce the
opacity to make it a bit transparent if we want. And when we are okay
with our layerstyle, we can just click key. Right away, we've
added more detail, more beauty to our text here
with our stroke layerstyle. Okay. Perfect. Now, maybe for this guy, we could add a drop shadow. Okay, so this looks quite sot. Sorry. On d. So I want to zoom in two
and you see it doesn't allow me to pick my my Zoom to. I can use my mouse with Zoom. So you can see it, so, but makes our text
stand out even more. Maybe increase the
opacity of bits. Perfect. That's our drop shadow a style. I want to add one moa
style to this mean text. Now, that's the pebla pose. But I want to really
reduce the depths. No really the depth,
maybe the size, and make this very soft. Increase the softness,
and reduce the side. And maybe just play around it. It's more. Perfect. And let's play with the cantos. We have this, we have
this, we have this. I don't want the effect
to be really shut. I just want it to
be quite so too. So this just to. Let's see about the size again. Yeah. This is perfect. We've done this done we've
added drop shadow to this. Maybe we should add
another drop shadow to this guy to make it
sound out to you more drop shadow capacity this stands size. Perfect. So we have our near styles, making our design come
to life even more. And now let's
change the color of our Niki we here with color
of or ingredient of a. Let's see red
color, re color is. Let's see blue or this
color. Let's see blue. Let's see the sheet
of blue or we could even add ingredient, if you have a blend
of this and blue. Perfect. I love this. Absolutely love this. Yeah, I like what
we have so far. For this one, I want
to just do one thing. I want to copy the Layer
styles from this guy here. That's our 90 logos. So click on the Lea style
itself and then copy. And then come here and then click on it and
piece Leer style. So see we've added the
gradient of a to this guy, and it looks absolutely amazing. Now we can see control S C, and with this we've
come to the end of our exercise on Stiles. See you in the next one. Bye.
48. Homework: Hey, guys, so a quick homework. I want you to create gold bars. So I want you to do
this on your own. Just create multiple versions
with different effects with different control
effects and share with me. Share with me, so I see
what you come up with. That's our assignment
for this module. That's only assignment
for this module. Yeah, that's it. See here
in the next one. Bye.
49. Module Introduction: In this module, you
will learn about blending moods and
how to B photo show. You'll learn how to
use blending moods to achieve incredible
photo effects. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue, and please reach out
to me via message or in the Q&A section if
you have any question. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
50. Getting started with blending modes in Adobe Photoshop CC: Here, guys welcome
back in this video. We are going to have a
very quick introduction into blending modes. So I'm going to
create my new file, choose my eight by eight, preset and create, and go ahead
and bring in some images. So please embedded, and
I'm going to choose this image and please
embedded, and this image. You know what are
blending modes. They didn't just
work for images, they work for any layer. So blending modes are basically the way two or more layers
blend to each other. So I can blend this
layer to this layer. So there are different
modes of blending. And these blending modes
are kind of categorized. As you can see,
there's this line that demarcates each set
of blending moods. So we have this
one, which is the normal and they dissolve, and they kind of
do similar things. So each of them kind
of do similar things. So we have the
darker, the multiply, color bone, the linear, and the darker color. We can see that they do similar things with
a bit of difference. And then we have
this other category, the lighting, the screen, the color dodge, the lighten
dodge and lighter color. And as I screw through them, you kind of see the way it blends out two
images together. We have to overlay
the soft lights, the hard lights, so
on and so forth. Now, let's look at this one. The difference, the
exclusion, the subtract, the divide we can see, the kind of weird effect they give us. All right. So that's
the category for that. Then we have these other ones which kind of mess
with our color. The hue, the saturation, the color, and the nosity. So this blandm was kind
of messed with the color. So we see that all of them
actually do similar things. And we're going to see how
to use them practically. To achieve really
incredible foot effects. Now, like we saw
on the ar styles, we also have blended moods
on the lear styles, right? Like, for example, if
you come to this option, you have blending moods,
if you come to the stroke, we have blending moods. If you come to the color overly, we have blending moods. If you come to the gradient
over, we have blendings. Let's look at color over nee, for example, and see
what we will get. Let's choose the
over. We can see how the color is blending
with the image, right? So maybe we reduce the size and then try other
ones. So soft light. Now, as we change the color because our
effect is going to change. That's how blending moods work. Let's check these guys. We want that me color. That's just a quick intro
into blending moods. Starting from the next video, which is an exercise, we're going to start
seeing practical ways we could apply this knowledge into achieving really
incredible photo effects. We see you in the next one.
51. Exercise 8 – Light flare from eye: Hi and welcome to this exercise. Now in this exercise,
we're going to be creating something
really amazing. So go ahead and open your
image to come to your folder, your blending Modes
project files folder. So select this guy this image, the girls eyes, and this
one, this lens flay. Select the both
of them and open. And now, what we want to do
is we want to click here and drag the lens flay into
our girls eyes image. So we can scale this. And now let's look at how
these two images play. So now, click on the image
and then let's come to light. So on lighting, we can
see that we have totally illuminated our black or brown. Lens flay is on the black
background or on black bgroun. But when we apply the lighting or the screen
or any of these guys here. You're going to eliminate our black ground and
just have the lens flay. So we can have this, and then we have the lights
coming from our eyes. So that the very effects
I wanted to create. Let's control to
duplicate and can even maybe rotate the lights this. Perfect. Maybe skill
it up and perfect. Yeah. That's that
for this with you. And this have come to
the end of our exercise. I was going to see my file, girls eyes so that you can have access to the
projects file. Now we're going to go to
the next blending exercise and see you in the next Bye.
52. Exercise 9 – Nike shoe and logo: Hey, guys. Welcome back. In this exercise, we're
going to do more blending. So go ahead and open your file. You're going to use
the Nike kicks image and the Nike logo. So we're going to use
blending modes to remove our white background.
The white background. Of the 19 Lugo. So now, we don't want to
white background, and we don't want to go ahead
and go through the stress of kind of ting out our
Lugo out of our background. So we're going to use
blending moods to do it. Very simple. One click. So just come to your blending
moods and on the darken, multiply color bone and
just this category. You're going to see that we totally eliminate our
white background. So darken and boom. We have our Lugo without
a white background. So we can have our Lugo here. And it's basically as
simple as that perfect. With this, we've
come to the end of this exercise, C
in the next one. I'm going to just see my
projects before I close. Perfect. C in the next one.
53. Exercise 10 – Light bulb: I'll come back in this video. We're going to do some
more interesting blending. Yeah. So go ahead and close
this file and open your file. Now we're going to be
using this guy here. That's the light bulb image and this lens flare and
this other lens flare. Good. So open them. We want to bring
all our lens flares into our lightbulb image. Just close this one,
click drag drop. Now you can close
this one. Perfect. Now just kill this guy
up and bring him here. Now we want to have lights
coming out of this bob. That's simply what
we want to achieve. Click and bring it on your bob, and then now select
your layer style. Sorry, your blended mood. Now we can use the
screen blended mood or we can use the color dodge. I feel this one gives us
that's what I call it. That's realism of blue in bob. Now, we can add this other guy, so we can have some flares
flares that come with bubs. Flares like this, n
flares like this, or light flares. Get
what I'm seeing. Kill this guy up
and we can see that we've been able to
achieve a gluin bub. If I just disable this mean guy, we can see what
this one is doing. You see what this guy is doing. Maybe we should try the
other linear dodge. We can see that it's
even a better blend with the linear dodge. Okay. But it's going
to be too much too. We can just reduce the opacity
of some of these layers. Yeah. So this will do you guys, and I'll just save my file, L light bob, Save Perfect. And with this we've
come to the end of our exercise, see
you in the next one.
54. Exercise 11 – African child: Guys, alma, in this exercise, we're going to be creating
our last land effect. Go ahead and open the
folder, and this time, I'm going to select
the African child and the foggy mountain
images and open. Now, I'll just bring the
foggy mountain image into the African child
and rescale it, re size it fits the frame. And I'll conclude this one. Then I create my blend
between two images. We're going to see what we get with hard light.
We get something cool. We get hard light, gives us this cool effect. Let's see. The
screen also gives us this cool effect
and colored dog. Maybe we do screen. The screen, and we can
control G to duplicate this and maybe
reduce the opacity. Yeah, so that judges for this exercise.
Really simple stuff. We can achieve with just
a click of a button. Yeah, and that'll be it for this one. See you in the next one.
55. Homework: Hey, welcome back.
In this assignment, you're going to be
creating a blend, go into your folder. And as you can see, we
have lots of images here. We have lots of images here. Now, I want you to select
two images of your choice. Get two images out of all of these images and
create a blend effect. So that's just the exercise. You just have to choose
any two images of your choice and create
a blend effect. So that starts for
this assignment. And with this, we've
come to the end of this module on blending moods. See you in the
next one. Bye bye.
56. Module Introduction: In this module,
you'll learn about selecting and cutting
in A D B photo shop. You'll learn how
to use the several cutting tools in Photoshop, how to refine your selection, and how to remove or change the background of an
image in a DB photo shop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue, and please reach out
to me via message or in the Q&D section if
you have any questions. I'd love to make this course five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
57. Getting started with the selection tools in Adobe Photoshop CC: Guys, welcome back. In
this very first video, we are going to
start learning about the selection tools
in a DB photoshop. Now these tools
are used to select characters or subjects
from an image, so that we can maybe fill in the selects piece with color
or change the background, or do a whole lot
of other things, maybe manipulate the
image or fill it with the content a we feel. That photoshop basically filling the select piece automatically. And we looked at that of course, in or our module on
cropping and stretening. Now we're going to learn
these tools and how we can use them to select subjects. So let's go ahead
and open Our images. Images will be used,
so we're going to start with these two images. We're going to start
with this image Pepe and then box. Okay. So go to your fol down on
selecting and cutting. All these images will be
made available to you. So select the bod
images and click open. That select one and ll down shift to select
the other one. Now for these tools, we have a number of them. We have some of
them here, we have some of them here, we
have some of them here. So we're don't to start
with the first ones. Click and hold, and you're going to see all these
one under this category. Now, this first one is the
rectangular Make select two. Then we have the
Elliptical Make select, single role Make select and
single column Make selector. I' going to go through them
quickly to see what they do. So let's start
with a single role Make selector to select it, come to your image. Now, just click and now you see that what we are no able
to we're able to select. Now if you Zoom inside, I to see that we've been
able to make a selection of R. I don't see these
two as very useful. I rarely use it. But that's basically what this tool does. So you're able to
select this role. Okay. And these tools come the option here on the
properties bar, right? Now, we have this one which
allows us make a selection, so we can select here. We can make a selection here. We can make a selection
here like you can see, and then maybe we do not
want to use this selection, then we can come here and
make another selection. So that for this one. Then this one adds
to our selection. We make one selection here, if we select this one, we're going to be
able to select that. We are going to be able
to select another one, another one, and another
one, another one. We going to be able to select multiple while adding
to our selection. These are subtracts from
our selection, right? You see subtracts
from our selection. And this one gives us an
intersection of our selection. But these are not
very big selections, so we won't really
see the effect. Let's just select some right
clicking and deselecting. So you can select and
click and select, or you can select and
click and select inverse. If you select invoice,
it's going to select the inverse
of that selection. You see it now I selected the
inverse of our selection. If you zoom in here,
you're going to see that it has selected
this side here and this and left out this particular
rule which we selected. Same also with this column. Sorry. Okay this is a
column, not to rule. That's left out this
particular column. Then same also with the
rule make select two. That's exactly the opposite
of this to select. Now we have the rectangular make select and elliptical
make select. Now, this elliptical,
We'll select Elis. Select Zoom out. Now, this one has gives
us a bit more control. So let's just click
and drag and we see that we're able to
select an Elis, right? We will shift. Aspect
which will be maintained. Yes. So we select, now we've selected our guy, and we can click and
move our selection. Let's see we didn't select the particular please we wanted. We can move our selection, or we can select move to
and move what you selected. So we are basically
cutting it out. So you see this shows us that
this part has been cut out, and so we can put it on top, we can move it around. And if you now go back to
our tool and deselect, you can see that our
change has been made. So our image has been modified, our selection has been moved
from here to here, correct. So I'm going to undo with
control Z Z a couple of times, and deselect. So we can see how
we've been to select. Lwise, we can see select
and then come to edit, come to feel and click on feel. And now we can fill in the
selected piece with colors or whatever with colors with
the foreground color, which is white with the
background color, which is green. And we can choose color. We can choose the content of were,
we can choose pattern. We can choose all
these other options. Let's try choosing color
and filling it with red, now we can see that we've
filled our selection red color. Let me just take
some little time to explain these things to you. Now, I just expanded my tooth box so that we're
going to see it well, now we have this guy
here, this guy here. Now, this is what we call
the foreground color, and this is what we
call the ground color. That's why when we
cut this guy out, when we cut our shape out
and then kind of moved it, we saw that it's automatically filled the ples was cut out
with our foreground color. So if we change this color, and then secrete a cotton again, and then now move
this guy again to see that we've now fill it
with our background color. You see. This is the
background color and this is the
foreground color. And we can actually switch between the ground color
and the four ground color. We can just click here, and you're going to turn
the prograun color to the four ground colo
and vice versa. You can just click
here and click here or you can do shift x, I'm doing shift x to shift the bagraun color
to the fo ground color. And we have the default color. The default color
is black and white. Now, I hit Shift D and brought me back to
the default color. So we can change the bground color and the
four ground color. And just do shift D, I'm going to tick back
to a default color, or shift x to change
between these colors. Perfect. Ltr creating a
shape now, for example. Now, if we create a shape, you're going to pick our four
ground color automatically. We to lets try
changing this to see, then try picking a sap. Picking a shape. Now
we see that it has picked automatically
a four ground color. So this is just by the way. Now we were looking at
selections and we saw how to use the elliptical Muti select two M selections to make
elliptical selections. And we can add to our selection. It means we can add here and keep selecting several ellipses. We get like this, like this. Maybe we would fill
our selections, good file or rather
good edit and fill selection with a column. And select. We see that we've been able to fill our
selection with colors. Okay? Now we have this
other selection tool, which is the rectangular
selection tool. All it does is the same thing this elliptical
selection tool does only that it select
rectangles or squares. So basically, that's
what this one does. For this one, we could maybe use it in an image like this. Okay, sorry, not an image like this because this one has images that have been tilted,
rotated angle. I won't work here,
but we're going to come to this image soon. We're going to use
one of these tools to cut out these boxes. So we're going to
use a tool that works for images like this. Let's just go back
to our PPA image. For this one, we could use
a rectangular selection. If we add to our selection,
we're going to add, we can subtract from our selection and do this
and then subtract this part. We can create more
creative selections by subtracting from
our initial selection, and we can intersect, which will give us
this intersection. Basically, that's
it for this one. Let's just close this
image because we've messed with it and
open a new one. Perfect. Now we have
these guys here, which are the Lasso two, the Polygonal Lasso two, and then the Magic Lasso two. Now, this is what we
do. The Lasso two gives us the ability to make
the selection freely, get that with free hand. So we can just click and make the selection with our mouse
and we'll see that selected. So that's what this
Lasso to does. To this, we come. Make the selection this.
We're going to select it. Now we can fill it,
we can move it. We can do a whole
other things, right? With our selection, just like how we saw with the
other selection tools. And then we have the
polygonal lasso two, which makes selections
in street lines. So we can see what we
are able to achieve. So we can kind of achieve polygonal selections that
selections with angles. This kind of selection. Not just that, we can use it
to also select our image. It means we will be
able to do this. We can use this to make
selections that are not necessarily pull go out as
far as the have street lines. We can using our old and
mouse wheel, make selection. We can just keep doing
this and select our paper. From our image. Yeah, so we
can actually use this tool. But there are even simpler ways see our Pepe subject
from our image, and we don't want to
look at some of the tos. So D that for the
polygonal lasso to, and then for the
magnetic lasso two, it works like a magnet. So if you click and
just keep dragging, it now creates points
around our subject. So we can see that
it automatically create points
around our subject. We can just keep zooming. Now, the only problem is if
you Zooming and zoom out, there is the possibility of
making the wrong selection. Just like how you can see here. This is a wrong selection. That's the only
problem, this guy. If you want to use
this guy, you have to maybe have a subject
which you can see completely without needing
to zoom in or zoom on. If we're making
the selection item we don't get our point, you can as well just click and it's going to
be created for Rs. And that is to for us. Of course, we could add to our selection like every
other selection to. So we can continue this, do this, and then continue. This is a work flow for selecting subject out of our background using
this particular two. You can keep
selecting two by lit by bittil you're
done with selection. You do that magnetic las two, then we now have these guys. Now these guys I called the
advanced guys or the big boys because they really make
our work incredibly easy, especially this one, which
is the subject selection to. And we're going to look at this last this subject selection to because it's the
craziest among all of them. This one was just
added into Photoshop recently to using an old
version of Photoshop. You might not get this guy here, but it's incredibly bananas. So let's start with
this Magic 12. Now, this magic
one, you can see, it's a magic one,
and that's magic. All you need to do select
your Magic 12 and click. On the background, and
you have it selected. If you can see the magic, so
it selects our background. Now it comes with a bit
of problems sometimes. So let's try selecting
this other background. Let's kick and see. And we see that we are not able to
select the background. Now, why did it here like this? Behave like this
because this background has a single color. So if you have subjects
that have a single color, this guy who select
that background. Yeah, it's going to select
without any issues without any approval because the
background has a single color. If your background doesn't
have a single color, you don't have any businesses
in the two magic 12. So you can see that
places like this, it's going to select easily, that places like this because
they have a single color. That's for this to. I have a single color, it's
going to select it. So we're going to
have issue selecting the Pepe subject because we do not have a single
unified color. So to selected guy. And then we are going to see the next one and this
is the quick selection to. Quick selection to is one of my most fiv tools for selection. In fact, it's the second
most favor because this guy replaced this object
selection to rep. Now, this quick section to,
all you need to do is to just click on your subject. You're going to select
it little by little. Gradually. You get select
the select and see. Now for this pe, it's going to select it very
easily because of course, it has a single
background, right? If you have instances like this where it selects
inside the subject, all you can do is press lt to change it from
a plus to minus. Now if you look at inside
the selection brush, that the quick
selection to brush, you're going to see a plus sign. Now if you click on lt, you're going to
see a minus sign. So it's basically switching
between this mode. We have the addition mode
and subtraction mode. We can as well choose this
mode for the subtraction and then select outside
our subject like this. Take it back to positive and you're going
to select inside our subject or negative and you're going to select
outside our subject. We can actually reduce the size of our brooch, we can click. We can cu to right click. We can just come here and
reduce the size of the brooch. So you can see that the
bth size has reduced. You see the bar
site has reduced. So like I said before, I'm going to show you a way to select these
subjects properly. Now, this is the tool
I was talking about, that's the polygonal lasso tool. So with this, we can select
straight lines. All right? O. Is, we will do this, we out at and select this, so we just click the points. Click the points. Click and then click finally. We see that we've
made our selection. I go to the move to now, we can move our box around. We can move our box around. And we will cheat our box. Well at our box and our
selection will be updated. Oh. That's for you to know. Let's go back to our Pepe image, and let's look at
a pot of them all, which is the object
selection to now. This tool is incredibly
bananas. It's just crazy. Select our object automatically, so we can just come and have
one click on our object. The Photoshop in its brilliance
will select our object. You can see it makes all of these tools just
audited. We get. But of course, if we
have a complex object in a complex background, we might have problems
with our selection, but it still does
an incredible work. Let's look at this example, so we can just click
and have our selection. Will take some time to
do its calculation, so we can see that our
selection is very accurate, and we can maybe choose the addition mode and then
select this other guy here. And fut takes some time to do its calculation and
we have our selection. So we can see that this
tool is the boss here. Mk selection incredibly easy. Okay, so that start for
our selection tools. This was just an introduction
into our selection tools. In the next lecture,
we're going to go a bit further into selection
in bef shop. See you in the next
one. Bye bye. O
58. How to remove the background in Adobe Photoshop CC: Here, we'll come
back. In this video, we're going to learn how
to reples background. And the last one, we learned
how to cut our subjects from our background and how to kind of use all
our selection tools. Okay. So in this one, we're going to learn how
to replace the background. So first of all, we have
to select our subjects and cut it out of our background before we replace
our background. So that's usually the
general work flow to that. So first of all, we
have to open our image. I have my paper image opened and also my boxes image opened. Images we used in
the last video. So the first thing I'll do is tick my desired selection tool, which is the Magic one tool
for this particular image. That's because the image
has very clear background. So I take my Magic
one selection tool and then click on my background, and I have my
background selected. Now what I'll do is
I'll just click on the lock button to
unlock my background. Andre are several ways of removing the background or
repecing the background. One of the very
quick ways you can do this is by simply
deleting the background. You can just hit deletes on your keyboard and the
background is gone. So you just selected
the background and hit the lets on my keyboard, and the background got deleted. So that's one of the very
easy ways to do that. We can also right click. After selecting the background, right click and do an
in selection that's selecting my subject and
then duplicate my subject. So I can do the control G
to duplicate my subject. So I now see under
my layers panel, that I now have a new
layer with my subject. So I can just off this guy. I can see that we now have a new layer for
only our subject. Okay, so that basically two, we're going to be reason
to change the background or to cut subject out of the
background in this course. O for now. We might look at
other advanced was later on. But for now, you just
have to either delete the background or duplicate the subject out of
the background. To see also with
our subject here. You can just tick our pgonal 02, which might take some time to
select, but to still work. Click, click click. Click and click to select, and we can just do control
G to duplicate it. If we hide our macron here, we can see that we now
have our guy here. That's our box. We can do same for
the other one. Click and click and click, maybe. Select this part also, and then close our selection. Or maybe let's select this part and then
close our selection. Perfectly, then we
can complete g and hide our background via. Now we have totally removed our boxes
from our background. I'm going to go ahead and open my folder and select a background 15 background
for our subject now. I'm going to select
this background too. And open. Now, I'm going to click and drag my background image
into these my images. Okay? So You can also click
and drag your selection, that your character,
that you've leave the background of into
the background images. So either way it don't work. Smeal so for this one. I fits my background to
fits the retion, my images of my subjects. And when I'm done, I just click completes and then bring my background
below my subject. And now we can see that I've pleased the background
for these guys. Now, it might not be very realistic now because
we don't have shadows and we don't have some other details which we
are in the original boxes. Of course, we can add shadows. We just put Mer styles and
maybe add a drop shadow, increase the size of bits, then the distance bits,
maybe red pacity. In criticize more. So we can have it spread. And if you are okay
with what you have, you just click and maybe copy the drop schado to the next guy here that's using lt and drug. Of course. We can see that
with other drop schaos and our selection now looks
realistic on a new background. We can do see with this guy. This guys let's bring him below, and we need to
select our ground. Click and select, and
let's just delete, delete. And perfect, we
have now been able to replace our ground
for our paper image. We will give it dynamic look. And yeah, maybe also
give it a drop shadow, give it that realistic look. Drop shadow. The
size, use opacity. And perfect we done. So as you can see
we've been able to replace our backgrounds. Yeah. And this we'll
come to the end of our video on background
replacement. In the next video,
we're going to look at a more complex scenario, a little bit more
complex scenario so that we learned how to
remove backgrounds for images that are a bit
more complex than just having straight
edges like we have here or clay grounds
like this one. See you in the next one. Bye.
59. How to cut out complex subjects and refine selections in Adobe Photoshop CC: I'll come back. In this video, we're going to be dealing
with a more complex image. We're going to
learn how to how to select and remove the background
of more complex image and further refine it to fit into our background into our
new background properly. You're hopefully going to be learning even better
ways of doing things. Let's go ahead and
open our image, go to file open, go to the folder and select this little girl and bon image. Click Perfect. Now we're going to
be using this image. As you can see, the image doesn't so much have a
contrast with our background. The background is white, and the image is quite
different from the background, but it blends a bit and
then we have hairs here. We have hairs and
we have has here. So we want to also remove the background of our hairs as much as possible. So you can see how complex. You can already imagine how complex doing something
like this will be. First of all, We have to start the tool and
then expand, right? So we are going to be
using this tool here. Or let's use our
object selection tool for the first thing, so we can just build
up from there. Select our subject
that's our girl. Let's add a selection. You have to be here and add a selection. Select our bunny. We can then add the selection. Okay from here on
we're just going to use this guy, the
quick selection to. So from here on we can now
use the quick selection to clean up the selection to select our automatic or
rather our object selection to couldn't select. We're going to start
with these places. You want to keep it at
plus and then just add the ps other little
places to your selection. So these places
we selected well. We can see, we're adding
them to our selection. Add a. We're also adding the
table here or the Yeah. This is a little table, I guess. We're adding it to
our selection two. And basically, we see
that we've been able to add all these to our selection. Let's go up to the hairs
and we can see that our tool did a pretty good job with the selection of the hairs. So we are going to
leave it like this. And I know we didn't select
other parts of the hair. But the method we're
going to use to refine our selection will help select
most parts of the hair. We just want to
maybe your selection quite simple for now. Okay, we've been able to select our subjects including
parts of the hair. So we're going to
see how to kind of change the background and
refine our selection even more. But first of all, I want to show you a few things we can
do to our selection. So we have the
select option here. Now, this select
option works with all our selection tools, so we can select all el see we select,
so we can select all. I can see that everything
that we selected. S do control Z to undo that. We can select, we can inverse. We can do a whole lot of things. We can also right click and do some of the things
we can do on select. Now, some of the
things I want you to learn is how to kind of
modify our selection. So we can select and then
modify our selection. This is where you go to
modify your selection. So we can expand our selection. So if you click Expand, we can expand our selection
by several pixels. Okay. So let's put ten pixels so that you can see how
it expands very well. If I click, okay,
you can then see that our boundary moves
from here to here. Let me undo that and then
use a bigger pixel value. So expand our selection, C by 50 pixels. We can see that
we've basically been able to expand our selection. Control Z. And then we also have recontract our selection. It's the opposite of expand, so we can do that by 50. We see that it
takes our selection inside our subjects.
We can do that. I do contro Z go back. Let's see the other things
we can do to our selection, so we can feather
out of selection. If you feather out our
selection by see 50 pixels, it's going to smoothen
our selection. Yeah, it's going to
smoothen our section, and if we do control g, we're going to see
that we know it we have the edges of our
selection very smooth. Unlike the previous time
where we control G and we had very straight lines or very straight edges
of our subject. This time because we added
a feder to our selection, you now have very smooth edges. Let's do that and
undo the feather. Now, let's check the guy, which is the smooth. It's similar to a fda only that it doesn't need
to lesser effect. See what it did. It's
mostly appropriate for objects rather
than human figures. Dot, control Z, perfect. These are just the few ways
of modifying our selection. I want you to see. Now there are many other options
here for select. We're going to look at
some of these options. We're going to work with
some of these options as the cost progresses. Okay. Now the next thing
we'll do is to come to our properties bar. It says selection or select and mask and click select mask. It brings us to
this place where we can now refine our selection. So it gives us some options
here under our view mode, so we can view it on black. It means we can view
our selection under a black background
or we can view it under this de called over. And we can select it and you will increase the opacity
or reduce the opacity. So we can see that
at 100% opacity, it's actually a red background. So it's a red
background, and you can view it under the
black background, and you can reduce opacity. You can choose high
quality reviews, even though it's going to
take a toll on your computer, or it's going to be more
expensive to your performance. But if you have a well
performing computer, you can always have
this option checked. So you have other view mode. We have the onion
scheme, which gives us that checker d pattern. That transparency
check board pattern. Of course, you can also increase the opacity or reduce it. Then we have the matching ts. For this, it physically
shows us our selection, matching our original image. We have other ones,
you can check all these ones for yourself, all the other ones for yourself, but I want to just have it on black. I want to
have it on black. I want to even
boost my opacity to 100% Check this to
remember settings, so we can remember our settings. D mean and then come to
here where it says reduce. Now, click on Smart reduce. What this does is, it refines
our selection by checking our emit one more time and seeing where we
didn't select well, which we should
have done better, and it's going to just
addit our selection. And if we increase our reduce, it's going to do that even more. So we might see areas where we didn't come into our selection. Let's just reduce it to see
some of the effects here. I just checked the smart radios and I'm going to
increase the radius. Now we can see what it's doing. You see what it's doing now
adding to our selection. The areas where we didn't
select well it's now adding, so we can see that these heads are being added
to our selection. But I don't want to
do this too much. That's what the
smart reduce does. That's what the
smart reduce does, and we also have the
smooth the feather, the contrast and the shift edge. You know what the smooth does, you know what the feather does. You know what the contrast does. And then for the shift edge, it shifts the edge
of our selection. If we shift the edge, let's say to here, you can see that our selection
goes even deeper. That's what we do. And we can clear our selection, we can inverse our selection. These are just the
settings for now. Now, if we want to
work more on our hair, We have to come here
to the left hand side, and we have the two,
which is the zoom tool, if you can zoom in
Zoom, we have this guy, which is the pan tool, you
can pan around our selection. You can zoom in, maybe
pan around our selection. Key. Of course, you can do
that with the Spice bar key. Hold the spice bar key and
click and drag to pan around, and also with the with the old key right
to Zoom and Zoom. We can walk on our heads by
selecting this guy here. Now. This is refine
edge Broch tool. If you click it and
click around our heads, we can see that we are not
able to refine our selection. We can just do this
for our heads. So we can see that our hair
strands are being selected. You can go down and do this
for other parts of the hair. So you can see our hair
strands are being selected. Perfect. It's basically
a brush tool. It has the size and the
hardness and the hardness will reduce the intensity
of the effect. You can do this for this p. We are now refining our hairs. You can also click and drag
to do it without having to worry about clicking
and clicking and clicking. Perfect. We are
now able to select our hair strands
more accurately. So you are not
accurate selection, you can just cont Z to
go a step backwards. And then we can do the
same for our hairs here. I'm just going to
use the bracket keys to reduce the size of my brush. And the size the mouth and do seem for displease. Perfect. You can see
that we've been able to do a bit of justice
to our heads. Perfect. I need to do more here. Perfect. Now, I
just want to shift my edge a little bit
so let's take this to see minus C minus four minus four is in bad, and then we want to
increase our feather. We say 0.8. And basically,
I think this will do. Now, click, and now you can
then duplicate your subject. Contri now we have our
subject properly refined. Now we can change
our background. Let's add this background. Let's click and drag drop size. Bring it below our subject. And now we have our subjects
under a new background, and all our hair
strands are showing. All our heads have been
perfectly refined. And yeah, that's
how to work with more complex subjects
in food to shop. And with this we've
come to the end of our video, see you
in the next one. But before I do, I'm
just going to see all of these guys into our folder or in our folder so you can
have access to them. Something control as safe. Close the background. Yeah, and this will come
to the end of our video. See you in the next
one. Bye. Yeah, so this will come to the
end of our video. See you in the
next one. Bye bye.
60. Exercise 12 – Image Background removal: Guys, in this exercise, we're going to replace an
image smack ground and do a little more extra
stuff to our image. Go ahead and open the image. Now put five, open and
select this image. African may be smiling. Open. This is our image. We can see that this isn't really tough subject because we don't have a flying around. So go ahead and tick
your selection too. Now we're going to let's use
our object selection to. Click on your subject
or your object. So click boom and we have
our subject selected. Tick the quick selection
to and on the start. Building up your selection. Now we're going to
have this selected. That's the addition option. We're going to add
to our selection. Add spat. Perfect. And add this part
be add this pot. And yeah, we're done
with our selection. So go ahead and refine
your selection. So we're just going
to add a little feta. O selection maybe 0.9. 0.9 and Have your
smart vids checked, and maybe the vids
should be one pixel. Perfect. Okay. Conclude G
to dedicate our subject. Now let's go ahead and
open our background image. So we're going to
use this background. Select a background and open. For this background, I
actually want to make it a bit wider. The first thing I
can actually just set my image and being
to a background. But I want my
background to be wider. I'm going to use my crop
to have my layer selected, and then have my content
of a feel selected. I going to just this big and
click Okay, the shops magic. You're going to fill our space. Have our space field. What I want to do is maybe
crop my mage because I didn't like this apart apart
my image, right? So maybe copy it to this point, and then reduce the size
of my image, my character. Perfect. Now we have
under the background. Now, there's a bit of contrast
between the brightness of our character and then the
bund side that the background is kind of the shot was kind
of ticking outside, right? But the character was ticking inside the building
or inside the building. So it's an interior shot while
and it's an exterior shot, so the lighting much match. So we just want to adjust our gout characters
that put the subject in the background so that the come close to
each other visually. The first thing I'll
do here is image, and then adjustments and
brightness and contrast. So use the brightness of. And maybe we use the contrast. Then select my background. Come here. Brightens
and contrast also. Let's increase the
contrast of my background. Let's reduce the brightes. Let's increase the
brightness of pits. Perfect. Last thing, I want to
just take my image, go to adjustments, and
then and saturation. I want to reduce the
saturation of pits. Let's play with the hue and see. The hue should be minus four. So we can see that
we've been able to at least create a bit of similarity between the lighting on our background
and on our mite, even though this
part is still dark. Maybe we fix that later, but let's do one more thing. Now let's tick out
and then creates a t. Let's see Bau Let's see beauty. Let's see But, but let's
do this that as BE A is one line and TY
is on another line. Let's do this and let's just bring this behind our subject. Maybe reduce our space. Let this to 300. I this please, maybe take
this to 700 or 1,000 points. Perfect. Perfect. So we have our image or
text behind our image. Change the color of our texts. Let's see which color fits more. An color that works
best for you. For me, I might just go with
black or black or blue. You said I'll just go with
this color and perfect. Now, if I like, I could give your drop
shadow so that we have the shadow casting on our image that put our
background and our text. Let's do the size
opacity, the distance. And OG. B. Perfect. Now, let's tick our levels. Let's try our levels. Let's see. If this would make some sense. I'm kind of looking for
to brighten this up. I know of a way I can brighten
this up by using masks, but with no covered masks, so I don't want to
go the for now. It's going to be a bit
too advanced for you. Let's just try these
other options. Let's see. This one works bits.
This one works a bit. Let's use this preset. Yeah, that's that's
let's try this. G. Hm. Perfect. That is it
for this exercise, we've come to the
end of our exercise. The next video, you're
going to be taking an assignment to see
you in the next one. And we can just see controls. I'm going to see this
as exercise. Exercise. And s. So guys be for this one, see you in the
next one. Bye bye.
61. Homework: Hello, there, welcome back. This is an assignment homework. You're going to be removing
the background image, and replacing with
another background, so come to the folder on
selecting and cutting. And we have this girl
with shots. This image. You have to remove the
background and then choose either of
these backgrounds. You have to repuce
the background of this image with one of these here and then maybe
you add texts, add text like you can
add crop shadows. You can do some
color adjustments, and you'll even add some graphic elements and
just make whole look good. That that for this assignment. I choose this email
because of the hair and some of the details we have. Removing the background
might be a bit challenging, but that will actually bring
your skill in this aspect, in the aspect of
background removal. Yeah, so that's it for this. See you in the
next one. Bye bye.
62. Module Introduction: In this module,
you'll learn about layer masks and
how DP Photoshop. You'll learn how to use
layer masks and how to create cleving masks
in how D P Photoshop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue, and please reach out to me via message or the Q& E section, if you have any questions. I'd love to make this course five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
63. Getting started with layer mask in Adobe Photoshop CC: Here, welcome back.
In this video, we're going to learn about
a masks in photo shop. We're going to learn
what they are, and how is it that
we can use them and apply them to our work
flow in photo shop. So let's go ahead and
create a new file. Let's use the eight by eight,
template using, create. And now, what's a mask? Leer masks reveal parts of our liar and can hide
parts of our layer. So we can use them to hide or
reveal parts of our layer. That's basically what they do. Yeah, like the masks
we wear to parties. Okay. All the Halloween masks. Some of them, when we wear them, we hide parts of our face and
reveal parts of our face. Okay. So like the mouth
might be revealed, then the nose might be revealed, and the yes might be revealed. Get. So that's just the
concept of the name masks. So that's just for you to
understand what masks do. And when we were
looking at layers, when we're learning
about layers, we saw the option to add
layer mask. Now, this is it. Can see this is
layer marks, right? Layer mask allows
you to hide parts of your image and then bring
them back at any time. Get. So that's what they do now. I'm going to create a square. Okay, I'm going to give
the square discolor. And that's just for you to understand what layer marks do. Now, I'm selecting my rectangle and then I'm using this g here, which is the layer mark two, so click and add layer mask. So we see nothing happened. Now in layer masks, there
is one most important rule. Okay. One very important rule. Now that's a rule
of black and white. In a layer mask, the white color reveals your image and the black colours
conceals your image. So you can see that our
layer mark is white color. It's a white color right now, so it's revealing our image. But whenever we paint a black
color on our layer marks, that parts where we paint
black will be concealed. So as you can see, we
can select our layer, which is this, and we can
select our mask, which is this. Now, select my layer. As I just click on the Tom Neal. You can see that my
layer is selected. And for this guy, my
mask is selected. And there is this
little link button in between them,
which links them. It means if this button is
on that if the link is on, we can move earlier, and our mask will
move without layer. But if it's not there, if
there's no link there, we can move our mask
without moving earlier. You can see now we're
moving our mark. I know you don't see it, but since the mask is selected, we are moving it and our
layer is not moving or we can moveer without
our mask moving. We're going to see this
practical ivation. Let's just delete the guy
and create another box. Give it probably the same color maybe brighter at this time. Perfect. Now let's
create another mask. Now I have my layer mask. Now this is white, right? Going to undo. Now pull
down t and click here. Now, lt basically inverts
the color of my mask. Get pulling down lt
while clicking here, inverts the color of my mark. So you can see that now
right now my mark is black, and my layer is
the, M layer is de. But you can see my layer. You can see my layer, because the black color of our marks totally concealed our layer. So it means does
cover our layer. So our layer is hidden because the whole
mark here is black. So if we start painting white on our mark, like
I'm going to do now, from taking my brush to and reducing the
size of my brush, and maybe the hardness
a little bit. Right now, I'm going to
start painting on my mask. Right now, you can see that my foreground color
is set to black, and my background
color is set to white. Right now, I want my foreground to be white and
background to be black, since I am going to be
painting white on my ar mask. So I can just click this
little button here. Click on it so that
I switch the colors. So right now, I have white
as my foreground color, and I have my leer
mask selected. Now if I pint, we see that
I am beginning to reveal parts of my of my rector good. Yet I have completely painted inside a rectangle,
and as you can see here, parts of it is white while
parts of it black now, the black parts are these parts, and just paint completely. So you can see that
everything now is white, and our ship is
totally revealed. I'll just delete my layer mask and add another layer mask, a new layer mask on my ship. Right now, I'll just pint, sorry, switch the colors. I'll just paint on this guy here so that I show
you more options, more layer mark options. While my liar mark is selected, if I come to my properties pan, I'm going to see options. I'm going to see density. I the density of our mask. You can see what happens as I increase or
reduce the density. We have the feather.
Now, the feather is very similar to the feather we looked at on the selection. Now, the feather feathers out
our selection, or our mask. It makes the edges smoother, smoother than what
we already have. We have some things we can do. Okay let's go ahead
and open an image. Let's let this go image. So that's on the
masking in Photoshop, go to the module on masking in photoshop and select this
African lady smiling. Yeah. So you just want
to have this image, and I'm just going to hit
this lock icon to unlock it, and then add a layer mask. So on my layer mask now, I'm going to tick my brush tube and
paint so as to reveal. Sorry, I'm going to just
increase the size of my brush tube by hitting
my bracket keys. Okay. Let's see if you want
to hide these parts. Perfect. No go two. Section two or move to rather. Now, there are other
options with layer mask, so we can right click
on our layer mark, and we can see several
other options. We can disable layer mask, so it's going to be disabled. Then we are now able
to enable it we want. We can delete layer mask, which will totally
delete our layer mask. And let's undo. And we can
apply layer max to image. If you apply it, it's going
to join with the image, it's going to be
one with the image, and the changes are going
to be permanent. You get. That's the option
to apply to image, and we can add layer
max to selection. It means Photo shop, it's going to select a mask. And then we can subtract
from selection, we can intersect marks, and we can select a mask. Let's see select a mask. So now it brings up the
option for defined edges. The options we use to
refine our selection, the are the time that
in the last module, it brings up these
options and then we can maybe increase the radios, increase the feather, smooth. And if we are okay
with our changes, we click okay and everything
becomes permanent. So these are the options
our Lear Max provides. So that's that for the
options under layer mask. Now I'm going to just delete layer mask and then show
you one last thing. Now our layer masks
can also help us cutting our subjects
out of our background, and it gives us a little
bit of more flexibility as compared to the
previous methods we saw from the previous module. Let's see we're using this
tool to select our objects. Let's try to our object. Perfect. Now we've
selected our object, let's use the quick
selection tool to just add to our selections. Doesn't need to be
perfect because this is just me showing you a very quick way of using layer masks to
cut out backgrounds, or cut out images or
subjects from background. So as to change
the background or do other things. Perfect. So we have our selection.
Now instead of CG to depict our
selection, Okay. Or maybe delete our background. Instead of doing that, or
going to select a mask, we can just go ahead and
create a layer mask, and we can see that photo
shopper created mask for us for our character. So with this selected, we can use our brush
and maybe reveal sorry, maybe reveal parts of our
background if we want. Or maybe we want to keep
the selection temporal. So maybe we want to
be able to disable to see the background around so
we can disable like this. Okay. Using the layer mask, really helps us to have more flexibility when
removing backgrounds. So we can just use
this workflow and remove the backgrounds
and then go back to the backgrounds literal
or modify our marks to add to our selection or to
reduce from our selection. So basically, that for an
introduction into layer mask. See you in the
next one. Bye bye.
64. Clipping masks in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, welcome back. So this one is going to be a very quick one. We're going to look
at what we call clipping masks in photo shop. So go ahead and open your
image or please your image, so create a new project, eight by 8 ", and
please your image. We go to please embedded, and we go to our folder, right? So what we want to please is, we want to please, let's see. Let's see. Let's see, let's see. We want to please this guy. Let's please Let's I'm quite confused as to
which one please. We can please anyone. Let's
just please this guy. Just that I don't like to
it's in a portrait wood, or we can walk with it, easy. Let's place it and then
maybe scale it up. S Scale it up. So I'm pulling down
all of co to scale it evenly or in an even manner. So I'm going to write see wall. Let's give this -25 or -50. L et's reduce this piece
in between our characters. Now let's reveal our wall image. Now, clipping masks help us to mask our image inside our text. So this can work for our
images, can work fors. So we have our image here. Now we're going to
bring our image on top of what we want to. And then right click, and then go to create
clipping mask. Click Create Clipping
mask, and right away, you can see that we have
our image inside our text. Okay our image inside our text. We can select our text,
our image rather. Click here and start to move. Also to adjust our image. We could even rescale it and begin to reposition
it to fit properly. In the manner, which
we want it to fit. If we're okay with it, we click done, and
y and we have it. We can also move our text. Click on your text,
click here and move it. We can move it to
position it well and. We can also select
the booth of them, move them together, kill
them together if we want. And we can even merge them
into one single layer. This merging them
completes the effect. It makes everything permanent. It means we can't
go back to change the image or to move
either images separately. So everything has to be
complete after this. That's about clipping masks. We're going to use
both clipping and layer masks in coming exercises, and you're going to
see how we can apply these features in our work flow and achieve incredible designs. This will come to the end of
our video on clipping masks. See you in the next one. Bye.
65. Exercise 13 – Smiling Lady: Hey guys welcome back
in this exercise. We're going to be creating
something really cool. Okay, let's go ahead
and open our image. We're going to be
using this image, the African Lady Smiling image. We're going to select
this image and our background one
image and open. Perfect. Now, I'm going
to go my lady smiling image and drag our image
into the background. And this time, I do not want to create or rather
remove the background. I just want to first of all, my adjustments and add
a few adjustments, maybe increase the
brightness bits, and reduce the
contrast the bits. And then um Maybe we should work on the
saturation and hue, may increase the hue, make it plus four and then saturation B to
the left hand side, maybe minus seven or minus nine. Okay, now I want to add
layer mask to our image. Add a ar mask. Then tick your brush to, and then make the hardness zero. The size should be just this. You can then start to paint. Fall. You have to change our
four ground color to black, and then start to paint
on our layer mask. And just start to hide
some parts of our image, mostly the background, right? Hide parts of the
background or image. Perfect. Perfect. Perfect. The next thing I want
to do is take my move to and we move my layer bits. I we reduce the
size of my layer, and then work on these are
the parts of our masks. These parts, the very sharp
parts, the left hand side. And yeah. So from now on, we want to use a blending mode on our layer. On our image. Let's see which blended
mood will work best. So we want to blend our
image with our background. So Let's see O. Let's just try other ones. Hard light is also good. Hard light also blends well, let's use hard light for now. And then now we want
to create a text. I don't use the
horizontal type two. I don't use the vertical
type two because I want to type along the vertical
axis and type smile. Perfect. Now, scale my text. And as you can see, my font style is in true. So that's the name of my font. It's in true it is stick font. And it's a free to use font. You can just google it,
intro font, free download, and you're going to
be able to download it from the Internet for free. So we wanted this big. But you can use any
other phone as well. You can use any other
phone that is this Tick. Let's reduce the spacing
between our characters. M this even this big. Then go ahead and open an image. Let's use this image. Let's use this image to
select your image and open. Drag your image to this place. Now we want to create a liar
mask between these two guys. We want this guy
inside our text. So it's going to be on top and right click and
then create a mask. So we have it on top. Now we can select our text and go to near styles
and give it a s. Perfect. Now, we go sow bigger, and then for the color, we want to choose a
color that's closer to red or then still dark. Perfect. And with this, we might just want to increase the distance between
our characters, and I think this distance
is just perfect. Do Ct, Cty. So I'm trying to reduce my text, but it's not going well, so I'm just going
to select my layer. That's my image. First of all, scale it because we can see this part needs scaling, right? We have to scale it so that
it fills our entire text. And then select our text
and then scale the book them so that we
have this Perfect. Well, let's adjust the distance between our characters
one more time. Maybe add a drop shadow to
our text to drop shadow. O text. Perfect. Let's adjust the color of stroke. Let me make it darker Perfect. So this is what we've
been able to come up with our our near
masks and p masks. And maybe I'll just
pink so more on our near mask to hide parts of the image and create
a more interesting land. I'm hitting X to switch between my background color and foreground color
because I want to reveal parts of Yeah, I want to reveal parts
of my image here. Perfect. Okay, guys, and that's
it for our exercise. So you can save this Control S and save it on the
masking in the. Let's see this as exercise one, or just exercise. Perfect. Or let's see with a
smiling ge exercise. Smiling girl exercise. Perfect. So let's copy this. Let me copy this and just delete this guy so that I
can V to the get. Perfect. So that's it for this exercise. Se
you in the next one. Bye.
66. Exercise 14 – African Child: Hey, guys, welcome back.
In the last exercise, we together created
this amazing image, the girl smiling and this smile text with
the image inside it. Yeah. So that's what we did in the last exercise
in this one, we're going to do
something different. Not really different,
similar, very similar. So we're going to work
with this African child file we started creating in the video on blend or in the module
on blend blending mode. So we're going to add
some more detail. To this design here. I'm going to maybe
mark out some parts. So first of all, I want to
put max a layer mask on. This layer one to click
and create my layer mask. Tick my brush to start painting it X to switch between foreground
and background color, and start painting to kind of
delete parts of that image. K. This is exactly what I have. Perfect. We have this. Next
thing I want to pre is, I want to have a text. So this text it's not going to be cult this time,
it's going to be. We just want to
have African child. African African child. Perfect. That's just what
we want to have, and then we need an
image inside our text. Let's make this 300
and see. Maybe 400. Perfect. Now, I want
to bring this layer. Remember, our layer is basically hidden because
our opacity is zero right. I'm just going to boost opacity, bring our layer up and
change the blending mode. Maybe before then,
maybe we'll just leave the blending
mode a screen for now, but I want to click on my layer and create
clipping masks. We now have our image
inside our text. If I can change the
blending mode to normal and then move our image. This Okay. So that's just what
I want to achieve. And right now, I can just add a stroke stroke would
work on our text. Create a stroke. Maybe give
the stroke white color. Let's see. White
colors isn't bad. Maybe we should
reduce the size bits. Let's try black. Let's
try something in color. Yeah. Let's go with
black for now. We change it later on. Black and then boot top
will pass the shot size, maybe 31 or two and enter, and then just move
the boot of them. We've selected the layer and also the text and move
the boot of them, maybe even s, then we bit
down and just have them here. Will be here or here. Either we is speak in sense and. Perfect. So this is what
we now have African child. So this we've come to the end of this exercise and see
you in the next one.
67. Homework: Hey, guys, welcome back. So we're going to be
taking a homework. On layer masks. So we're going to
between the homework on both layer masks and clipping marks just as we
did with our boot exercises. Okay, so with your folder. And in your folder, you have this image. You have this image. So we're going to use this
guy as the background. We're going to use this image. So we're gonna cut
out this image and put on the background
and then use your layer masks to create creative blends between the
image and the background, and you can get other images and just be creative
with the whole thing. And you should also use
this image to create a clipping mask with a text
all on this background. So just be creative with the whole thing and share
your results with me. I'd love to see what
you come up with. Does it for this assignment, see you in the next module. Bye.
68. Module Introduction: In this module,
you'll learn about transform and distort
in a DB photo shop. You'll learn how to
use the transform and distort features of photo shop, and also how to
distort subjects with a lupifi tool in
A D B photo shop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue. Please reach out to me via
message or in a Q&E section, if you have any questions. I'd love to make this course five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
69. Getting started with Transform and Distort in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hello and welcome back. So
this video is an introduction into transform and distort
in Ado B Photo shop. So go ahead and open a new file, create a new file
eight by eight. No adverts, Create. Good. Now we have our new file, and what do we mean by
transform and distort? Now, since the beginning
of this course, we've actually been doing
transform and distort, at least some parts of it. I transformation is basically
either rescaling our ship, or routing our sheep or moving our ship or transforming
it even further. Now, we've looked
at how to rescale, how to resize how to
move, how to route, but we've not looked at the other forms of
transformation, which are a little
bit more advanced than simply rescaling
or routing. Now, these are what
we're going to be learning in this module. Now, select your guy, your ship, go to image. So we're good to edit, and now you see where we see
transform path, right? Transform path. We
now have the scale, we have the rotate,
we have the skew. You say you know scale, of
course, you need that keel, I just to scale it down, scale it up, key. And then very quickly, we're going to go
through all of this. We see rotate. Routine
of course, rotate it, we know the skew or Mb not for
the skew simply does this. So ship it transform
our ship like this, so we can physically
do this to our ship. Basically the distort ship. Doesn't come in handy.
Most of the times. We use it personally so much. But that's what the skew does, and then we have the distort. Now the distort does this. Ks distort our ship like this. You see what it does, right? So we can complete our ship, and now we have our
distorted ship. So I'll do and go to it. Once more, the transform path. And now we have the
perspective which does this. The perspective does
this. Pesca distorts our ship and creates
a perspective. That's what the
perspective does. I'm just skimming through all of this very quickly because we are actually going to look at some really more advanced stuff. But basically all within
the transform options. Now we have what
we call the flip vertical. To show you this. I'm just going to
bring in my flag of America under the transform
and the stored folder. So go into the project folder
and select the flag of America and open,
then bring it in. Perfect, maybe re scale it. Relex re skis cally and enter. Select your flag, edit image, transform, and then
flip horizontal. And see what happens right. We'll flip in our
image horizontally, and you can also
flip vertically. Flip vertically, and
this is what we get. Transform. Now you can look
at all these other ones. They are very simple. Now there is this one we call
work. This is the work. And then this is
the one that gives us the most flexibility. This, we can physically turn our flag into a dynamic flag that into a
flag that is actually moving. So we can turn the image to look like a flag that
is actually move. We get you can have this this
is that's distorts for you. Luck make this. Cove have it kind of
bending this week. Okay? We have this guy comes. This one. So see our flag is
bending flag is bending. Now we can simply add some
shadows to this part. Let's see, we want to add
shadows to this part. First of all, select this part. Sorry, Let's come and do
our selection from here. Y. We can see that I'm not really trying
to get the perfect selection because I just want to show
you this very quickly. This is not the main thing or the most important
thing for this module. We have other things
that are really important under the
transformation. We can see that we've
selected this part of the map of the flag. We could just control
G to duplicate it. And then come and
create a new layer under the duplicated part. On this new layer now, we can use our pint, change the color to black, maybe reduce the side of our brush using the
square brackets. We can start painting
inside here. We start painting inside here. Pints Pints like this. Okay, and we can just take
the riser tool it E for that. E the riser tool
it's used to clean. So you can take the Eraser
tool and just clean. I also works with the bracket to for resizing or rather the
bracket keys for resizing. For resizing, of course,
the size of the riser. You can also right click to see the size and the
hardness, we just reduce. And t's now clear this No. Perfect. As you can see, we've now added shadows under our flag here. It's basically showing
that this part is turning. It's casting shadows
on our flag. Now, we can maybe change the blending
mode of our shadows, we see multiply and then
just reduce opacity of bits. Maybe see 77%, and see
it looks very listed. These are some of
the things we can a with our transformation. So basically, it is a
very quick intro into distortion and transformation
in A to B Photoshop. The next video, we're
going to look at how to do transformation using
the Lifi effect. And afterwards, we're
going to look at how to apply this knowledge
that does transform knowledge which we just learned in actual projects
here in Photoshop. So see you in the next one. Bye.
70. The liquefy effect: Guys welcome back in this one. We are going to be learning
about the Lukefi two or the lukefi effects because it's basically
an effect of the two. Here is it in photoshop. So I do not want to just
delete what we've done here. I can't like the flag. So what I do is I'll save
it in your project folder, so you can come and
see what we have done. Past S. And then save
this as the flag. O let's see US flag. L project. G. Perfect. So seeive. Now I can close my project and
also close the flag. Okay. So open your folder. Let's choose this guy here. So the funny man
image is what we're choosing to select
the image and open. Now we're going to use
this image to see what our luefy to can bring, or our lukefy effect can bring. Now this image is really, really funny, really hilarious, and we're going
to use the lukefy to to physically make
our image less funny. So first thing first, let's lock our er, and I want to make this guy a smart object so that you could turn off
the filter later on. So you can come to
filter and then come to convert for smart filters. That's another way of turning your image into a smart object. So you see it's now
a smart object. You can go to filters and go to our u or our luefy effect. I keep seeing to, and this
is what it is basically. So it's basically
this separate window. So we walk in this window. Now we have the tools here. We have this guy, which is
called the Fard wap basically, if you select any to the options so that you kind of adjust the level of effect it has on our subject to fa select my
ford wap and I just do this. It basically distorts
our image like this. You can go this total image. Make his port beady bigger. Okay. It also works with the bracket with the
square bracket tos, or rather the square bracket
keys on our keyboards. We can increase the
size or the size. Of course, we can do
the sliders here. Okay. So we can make
his belly bigger. But of course, that's
not what we want to do. And we co preview so we can see the original
and see the after. So d do 12. Let's just undo that and take
it back to the beginning. So that's what this guy does, and we have this one
which does the construct, and we're going to
see it in the bit. So first of all, let's
start with the sky. So I'm just going to
increase my porch size and pushing pot belly. So I want to really
eliminate pot belly. I want him to be healthier. I want our guy to be healthier, so it's better to have pit
brushes and dot movements. Get. So you see. I am physically taking
his belly back. So he no longer has pot belly. Wow. He lost so much weight
with some seconds. Just by a few clicks
of the button. Let's preview and see what
we've been able to do. Let's see before and
after before and after. Basically, this is what
we've been able to achieve. I the tool so quickly. We can even give him chest. And then this reconstruct
tool is basically an do tool. If we don't like the change, we can actually just use the reconstruct to tick
it back to the original. We can just do this
or we could do this to tick it back to the
original, just like this. I don't want to take this guy
back. I just want this one. So going back to my tool here, my ford tool and making my tool, my brush bigger. I
just doing this. L et's move the chest a bit
bigger or a bit forward. This is what we have so far. Now let's look at this
two. This is the blot. I'll click on the
blot so we basically Ms we click and who we see it biceps, right? Click and hold and you see this. But you don't want
to do this too much. You don't want to do this too
much because you can really get weird if it's to get. But this is basically
what it does, and then this other guy, which is the plucker to does opposite basically
makes ten smaller. It makes our selection smaller. Let's just go back
to the plot and in b se moles, a
couple of clicks. So we can side from a
very unhealthy guy. Our guy here is turning
into a very strong guy. But the power of the ify to. Now, I'm going to add here, I'm going to make this big also. Perfect. Now we can
see. He no longer has hot belly and
he's even more sul. So we've done some really
great fever to this guy here. We've made him lose
weight in minutes. We can make our neck like this. Perfect. And we have
other tools here. We have this guy,
which is called, this guy, which is
called the frieze to. This frieze to basically
allows us to paint an area. Let's say we want to paint here. So it allows us
to paint an area. And then whatever we do, with other tools, does
not affect that area. Now, you see, if I do this, doesn't affect this area. This area that hasn't be
painted gets affected. And we also have this two, which is called the
two or the thou mask. The thou mark to. Now, this one just like an
araser for this two. It's an easer for
the freeze mark two. Basically cleans. I get so that's what they do. And the t to just does
some words twirling. Let me show you. If
it is what it does. Okay. It does. I'm just clicking and hold
it and achieving this. So this can come handy when
you're doing things like caricatures, what it here. Now we can give our
character here six packs. Let's too much. Maybe reduce the pressure. Let's reduce the pressure. Maybe make our size. The size of our bush smaller. So we've been able to
give our guy a six pack, it looks fake, but
it can still work. It is for demonstration
purposes. If we want to really
give him a six pack, we settle down and
do that properly. T. That for for this one. We can also adjust
the legs or this moz. Let's at this the tall two. Let's. Go back to the
forward the forward. Let's make. That's to exaggerate. Physically meet him strong
man from a really weak man. Really weak and unhealthy here. Met him really
strong and health. He's physically a
body builder here. So that's how you typically if effect or the liquify
filter. It shop. Now you can hide your
smart filters and hide it. Now, I'm just going
to see this guy. So it's titled the funny man, and it's a PSD file. You can have access to this
file in your project folder. So this will come to the end
of this video on the LP 52. See you in the next one. Bye.
71. Exercise 15 – Sporty Man: Hey, welcome back.
In this exercise, we're going to be doing some
interesting marking up. So go ahead and open your
project folder and bring in the confused young
sporty man image and also the flag of America. Bring them in. And what
we want to do is we want to please the flag of America. On his band on his head band. K. So that's what
we're going to do. So we want to place it on his head band and
his hand bands. But I'm only going to do the
head band in this video, and in your homework, you are going to
do the hand bonds. Okay, so that's what we do in this video or
in this exercise. I just pated the flag
and just hit one. Okay. So convert this
to smart objects. So that we don't lose our
quality as we re scale size and transform our image. So we reduce our size
or size our image. And finish and then
come here on the image, and sorry on the edit. And let's go to Skew. Let's do this on the skew. So let's basically do this. Okay then ****. Perfect. We want to just use our free
transform on 12. To edit and go to the ap. Okay. So now we want to use the p feature to basically
blend our image. It does this if we do not
click on our anchor points, or on our points. We have to be clicking on our
points or on the handles. We can also click
on the handles. Let's just o in and see. Okay. So it's becoming too hard
to select our points. So I'm just going to be more careful so that I keep
getting that awkward sound. So we can also select inside
our ship and do this. This guy here. Let's do this or modify this part to flow with the movement
of our head band. Oh, Oh Oh we can mit with this. Next thing I want to do is just kind of use one of
these blending moods to blend a flag with
the background. This blending mood, that's the multiply does
justice to blending. And we can just
maybe add a stroke. Two pixels, big center. Okay so two pexels center and k. Perfect. So this is good to see you in the
next one. Bye bye.
72. Exercise 16 – Face Distort Poster: Guys will come back.
And this exercise, we're going to be using
our lukefi tool to create reveal effect.
Reveal effect. So let me just go ahead
and open our imation. Come to your folder or your project folder and
open the pretty girl image. And we want to first of
all, select our subject. So take this very
interesting object selection too and just select your object. And we won't really
take so much time to want to define our
selection, to make it perfect. You're going to look with
what we get with a default click kick to go ahead
and select and mask. The fact that you can see,
we really did our tool an incredible job
intellecting the image. So we just want to zoom out, we can do control zero
to fit our image. And you see it
remembered our settings. I remembered the radius, a smart dice, how
smooth our feather. So we can just okay and then control duplicate and
height up ground. Next thing I want to do is stick my cpto and make this bigger. I want to make this big. Maybe okay. No reduce the size of our Image. Myb just take the cup to. I just hit on my keyboard
to make this even pig. Okay? So I'm hitting, I'm putting down ts and shift. Make this big. So bring this down
and right now, I'm going to select this guy. Then I'm going to control
G. G to duplicated. And I'll just add a black and white filter or a black and white adjustment
to our image here. So this default
one, two, perfect. So the next is just
save my image here. Go to filter, convert
for smart filters, has to turn it into
a smart object. Go up to filter, go to liquefy, and I want to just do
something really simple here. Our pressure isn't very
strong so do and make our pressure 100
and drug my image. Like this. Make this smaller my image like this. All I need to do now is click. We're basically revealing our color image from
our black image. We're using this
liefy distort effect to reveal our color image. I don't feel the
color correction for this color images right. I want to just use this
adjustments here to make quick adjustments
to our image. So I'm going to use the levels. Maybe make this a bit brighter. Perfect. Let's see if levels do work well on the
black and white image. Also, let's try to
adjust the levels too. Perfect. And then
on our color image, I want to also our saturation. So basically adjust
our saturation, may make it a bit
less saturated. Yeah. Perfect. So the next
thing I want to do is is just create a new layer to
create a new layer here, then come to my tools and
take this g ingredient to. Click on the ingredient
tool, and we want to add a gradient feel
to our empty layer. So click here and drag
while holding down shift, so drag it up so as to
create a gradient fiel. So now we've basically
filled our layer here. O empty layer, ingredient
feel now, we can choose Gradient preset pently is on this blues because
I worked with it last. So you can choose other ones. Choose anyone of your choice? Let's go with this one. I'm
going to go with this one. You can choose any other one. If you don't like that one. The side of this guy and do ok. And I think one last
thing I will do is maybe have a text. I want to just type
real and make this. Let's see. Let's try this behind of black
image. Let's see. Okay. I want to bring it behind our
black image put on top of our black and white image so that we create
this complexity. But you know what? I'm
just going to I'm just going to keep it simple
and work with this. Select our text. Let's just on it right inside. Perfect. And maybe
change this color. You want to give it
don't give it a con. Let's see. Yeah,
is just perfect. Perfect. And yeah, we
could just finish here, but I can I'm feeling I should
add distort to our text. Let's click on free transform. Click on this. And do this. We'll do this. Perfect argument, is below. And yeah. I'm thinking I should
add something else. I'm not just too satisfied. I'm thinking I should
add another text. Top not bad. But we could have
instead of reveal, we could have image
review image review. So pulling sublating
it to the top to have this guy 100 opacity so that we have
image image review. Just that smaller
bits a bit lower. And yeah, I like
what we have so far. So this we've come to
the end of our exercise. See you the next video. Bye.
73. Homework: Hey, guys, welcome back.
So this assignment is all about transformation
and this Tout. So go ahead and open your folder and go ahead and bring in this
confused young Sporty man. So your first assignment
is to bring in the flag of America and mark it up on this hand band
and this hand band. That's the first
thing you have to do. Then the second thing you have
to do is to use this guy. And give him some modes. You give him some modules, using the lupefi filter and just make him
basically better, using the lupefi
filter in photoshop. Yeah, so that's it
for this assignment. See you in the next
module. Bye bye.
74. Module Introduction: In this module, you learn about filters in how to B Photo shop. You'll learn how to
use filters to achieve incredible visual effects
in how to B Photoshop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue. Please reach out to me via
message or in T&E section, if you have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
75. Getting started with Filters and Effects in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, everyone welcome
back in this video, we're going we get
familiar with filters. So go ahead and
open your folder. Come to filters and effects. Let's start with this image. Click on this image that's the wedding girl image and open. We're going to start to learn about filters using this image. Filters are physically effect. We add to our image, so they are physical effect, and they just change the
video look of our image. In order to add filters, it's best to first of
all turn our layer into a smart object so that the
changes are not permanent. So that you can go
later on and disable the changes and make
changes to the effect. So basically, that's what
we're going to do now. So you can, of course, right click and tone and
convert to smart objects or come to filters and then
convert for smart filters. It's basically the same thing. So you hit okay. No filters are here, and we looked at one filter
from the last module, that's the liquefy filter, and we saw how this
guy works, right? In this video, we're
going to be looking mostly at filters under
the filter gallery. We have what we call
the filter gallery, and some of the filters
found here are also found in these options
in these places. Some of them are found
here, but we're not going to look at every
single one of them. First of all, we're going to
handle the filter gallery. Click on filter gallery, and it's going to open this
window, this interface. You can use this minus button here to zoom out of your image. You can see that we were working on a filter called
the half ton effect. Which we're going to be looking at in one of the exercises. But for now, we don't want
to add the half to pattern. So we're going to
start with what we call the artistic category. As you can see, they
are into categories. We see we have this guy, which is the artistic category, we have the brush, stroke,
we have the distort, we have the sketch, have the stylize, we
have the texture. Then we have this
place where you physically see the
effect as it's added. And you have here so that
you can zoom out and zoom in and visualize your effect properly. We have
this other side. Which enables us to make
changes to our effects. So whatever effect we select
has its set of values, which you can use to
adjust the effect. Now, first of all, I'm
just going to count on this because our
image is quite large. To go to images, or go to image d
rata and image size. So our image is quite large. So we don't want our
image to be too large. If not, it's going to slow
down our effect application, and we don't want
to spend forever trying to apply these fitters. Here, instead of 62 ", I'm going to make this
going to make this 25 ". Let's walk with 5 ". Perfect. C zero. Now, I'll select my layer
on more or my image, and go to filter,
then filter gallery. So things will be w faster now. Now, let's just close
this guy and go to artistic so we can start
looking at them one by one. And we might not really
cover all of them, but we will have an
idea of what they do, or what most of them do. So we have this guy, which is the colored pencil basically giving this effect to our image. You can given this effect. We have the pencil width,
we have the pressure, the stroke pressure, we
have the piper brightness. Yeah. These are the sliders you could adjust for
this particular filter. You have the cut out filter. And this cut out filter basically
does this to our image. We can increase or reduce
the number of levels. Now, see what happens when I
reduce the number of levels. We had it at eight. So now we are bringing the levels
down to C three. Now you can see
that it is trying to cut down our
number of colors, simplify it to three colors to basically levels of colors. Then we have the edge
simplicity. This is what we get. So we can see that
it's basically turning our image to our C sketch. So we can use this
effect to create cartoon or vect effects without having to draw
using our pen tool. So that's what this guide does, and then we have this
slider fidelity. I physically
simplifies our edges or adds details to our edges. Basically that the cut out, and we have the dry brush. We have the film green, and I'm not going to
be able to look at all of these obviously. But I'll do my best
to skim through them. And we have the fm green
and just basically adds greens to our image. You see? Were adding
green to our image? That's noise to our image. We can adjust the highlight
area and the intensity. I is higher or you get basically that this effect for
us. Density higher. And then let's look
at a few others. We have this guy called Fresco. We have this guy
called new blue, so you can change the color. He what we get
between new and blue. Perfect. Now, I'm just going to look at some other effects
on the here we have. This guy, which is
the accented edges. These are the guy, which is
called the Angled strukes. So these are just
artistic effects. We can add to our images. Okay. You see what we are a Perfect. Now let's look at this texture. On that texture we see some of the things we can do to
our image, we can add green. And this green is
a bit different from the one we added up here. It's more cleaner. Then we have this
guy steed glasses, which does this to our image, turns it into a glass t
or a stein glass art. That's it. And our image into your
class are perfect. Now we have this
one, texturizer. And then if you come here,
so if you come here, you're to you to choose different effects
that these effects are here. You to choose them.
You to go through them straight away by using your
keyboard direction keys. I'm just using my key direction keys to go through all of them to s key
through all of them. See how easy it is go
through all of them. I really like this blue. So we can see the effect
it's adding to our image, giving us this blue effect. This is what we had before. This is what we have now. And there's one more
thing you can do. You can stack filters
on each other. So it means you can have this this filter glue and then
stuck another layer of filter. So we could maybe choose
another one, different one. It's going to be on top of this, and it's going to be
just like layers. You get you can change
their position, right? You can bring this guy up
or bring this guy down. You can see that the effects
change also. Let's see. Let's try to cut out this glue. So you can see that the glue
simplifies our growing, and then the cut
out turns it into this sketch type effect. This sketch type effect.
If you just the glue, you see the effect it's added. So basically that's we can
add effect on each other, and we can actually delete
them by just clicking here. If you want to add another one, you just click here, and you can add another one. You can have multiple filters. And if we are okay with what
we have, just click okay. It's going to apply the
filter to our image. Perfect. Now, because we
have used the smart filters, it means we can switch of
stitch on our filters, right? Future stitch of filters. We're just going to
switch it If you let's fit this guy instead so that we
can add more filters. So go to filter. Then
now we have these guys, which are the blow filters, you can add the blow to your image lets try
the gasian blow. You can see what does to
our image at this blow. And then we have
the blow gallery. These are all types of blows. We have the distort, which does some distortions
to our image, we have the pull,
which basically adds a ripple effect
to our image. We can increase the amount, and this will be good if you were creating
a water effect. That's a ripple effect on water. That's the ripple effect
for you on the distort. We also have the wave effect, which is the wave effect. Yeah, that's the we effect. You can look at all of
these options for yourself. I'm not going to spend time reing each and
every one of them. So let's look at one more tot. Let's see 12. 12 basically does some weird
stuff to our image. You see twirl in our image. But all these effects
can come handy. In certain designed scenarios. Some of them might look
really unnecessary right now. But if we start applying them in some really special scenarios or some really
advanced scenarios, design scenarios,
you'll see that we're using them to
achieve incredible things. So we have the pixelate, and it has its own
effect sets of effect. We have the Music, which does this image basically
pixelate our image. It turns our image into pixels. So that's the Mic filter. And then we have the whatever
you call it mesotin, mesotint, this mesoin does. It has different option,
dots, so many options. Look, these effects
are so, so many. We can't go through
them in this video. We can go through all
of them in this video, but you get the point. You get what and what we can
achieve with these effects. So what I'm going to do
is from the next video, we're going to start
handling exercises so that we learn how
to do specific things. We learn how to
complete specific tasks with some of these filters. So it's not going
to be too advanced. It's just going to be on
the fundamental level, so that you get started with using these filters
in real life scenarios. So that'll be it
for this video on getting started with filters, see you in the next
video, bye bye. O.
76. Exercise 17 – Turning picture into oil painting: Hello, guys. Welcome back. In this exercise,
we're going to be turning an image into
an oil painting. So we just close file. A from the previous video, and then go to open
and go to the Fund. And this is the image
we're going to be using. This image, sorry. M Michale. That's the name. Michael, select the image and bring it in. And let's look at
our image size. First of all, let's
look this guy, select our image, go to image, and then image size. So we don't want to
have a too large image. So this is 83 ". Now that's very large,
incredibly large. So I just want to induce my
image size to say, S 30 ". 30 by 20 so you just fine. Just click k. Perfect. Control zero to bring our
image to frame and now select your a filters convert
for smart filters. Now we can start
adding our filter. Just going to file filter, and then go to stylize
with the stylize, and then you see oil
paint here, oil paint. This is basically a filter. We're basically turning our
image into an oil painting. We have the stylization. This basically changes the style of our oil painting,
we want it to be. Closer to reality or
closer to being realistic or very very oily, right? So that's basically
what sization does. We have the clean ness, which basically shows how
clean our effect is get. This is what the cleanness does. So you can leave it at 8.5, we have the scale, which is, of course, self explanatory. The scale of our effect. We want the scale to
be large or little. Yeah. So this will be just fine. Then we have the bristol detail. Okay? It adds details, some details to our oil painting or more details to
our oil painting. Then we have this lighting. Let's bring this Let's out. Let's see what lighting does. Checks lighting. We see
what lighting does, right? This is without lighting. This is without lighting. This is lighting. I is without lighting. Let's. This is lighting. We don't want the
lighting to be too much, Let's try reducing the shine. This is what we have
with lighting at 100. Yes. It all depends on what
you want to achieve really. It depends on what
you want to achieve. You might light this effect. You might want to
reduce the lighting. No reducing the lighting will
bring it closer to realism. But taking it high, will give
it a bit of abstraction. Yeah, basically depends on
what you want, and it's art. Yeah, it's art. Someone
might like it this way. Someone might like it
this way, yout like it. Art, and basically depends on the effect you want to
achieve as an artist. I'm just going to
leave lighting at 1.6. I don't want it to
be two vio, 1.8, C 1.8, and then, we now have our oil painting. We can do more things to
this image if we want. I will add more filters, but that's not the
objective of this exercise. You just want to add our
oil painting and be done. You can see the
before and after. Now just save our image. Oil painting oil painting. And save. Yeah, so this will come to
the end of our video or our exercise on turning our
image into an oil painting. See you in the
next one. Bye bye.
77. Exercise 18 – Adding camera blur: Hey, welcome back.
In this exercise, we're going to be
adding some camera blow to depict depth of
field in our image. Okay? So let's go ahead
and open our folder, and bring in the winter image. So bring in winter image, plus the oil painting image. Then let's look at our image. I think our image
is a bit too dark, so I'm just going to do a little adjustment to
our level K levels. Let's do this. Let's check before to this before and after. I think we can work
with what we have now. So on local layer and then go to image image size and
let's see the image size. This is 54. Let's make
this 40 to images. Perfect. Now, select this guy filter, convert for smart filters, and we want to try We want to try what we call the
blow sorry, the field blow. And the field blow
does this to us. It gives us the points,
these blow points, we can move around and
basically adjust low values. We can please multiple points, so we can see one point
here, one point here. Get to this guy now. We have low options here, and other effects even. We even have motion effect? Noise that we have effects, but we don't want to
focus on low for now. And now we can select
this guy since it's at the middle and basically
increase or reduce the blow. But we want it to
be reduced right since it's the one
closest to the camera. Now you can also increase or reduce the blow using
this slide ahead. You can go around to increase the back to reduce the blow. We just want the blow
to be zero. Here. But we want these
other guys to have more blow because they are fiery and since we're trying
to depict motion blow, means sorry, since we're trying
to depict depth of field, means The things
that are father and the camera will be more blowed out, will
be more blowed up. While the ones closest to the camera will be
less blowed out. That's why we are having
our image less blowed out. So let's have one here. This is going to be zero. But we are going to have
one here and one here. And we're going to
make this e higher 29. Just this higher. Maybe
one and one we do. And then let's have one here and totally remove the
blow and also one here because they are very
closest to the camera. The further we go,
the more blod image, we get let's have one here and let's
basically reduce the blow. So we clear the blow or most of the blow on our shirt.
I'll leave this shirt. Let's bring this
guy here and reduce the blow this this error. And basically, we've
been able to add our depth of field
a minute long. Okay. Now we have our flow. Now we can hide our effect
to see before and after. Okay, that's and we can also use other types of blow
to achieve this effect. Like for example, we could
use the gaussian blow, so we could blow
the whole thing. We could blow the entire image. Let me just try to
duplicate this layer duplicate layer and just hide this layer and
disable filter mask. No Let's rasterize
this layer so that we totally remove the filter.
Let's just control. That duplicate the
layer once more. Then go the filter and blow
and then gauging blow. So we could add this
gusan blow, for example, and then just add
the layer mask and take our brush to make this make the bruh
bigger and then just make our foreground color
black and start painting. This is another way to do it. We actually want our
partners to be very low. Then our size could be pier
so that we clean this place and A If we just disable our er, you'll see the effect we've
been able to achieve. You can use this method or use this method. Get
to either of them. We do just fine.
Control S for saving, and then winter exercise. Camera blow exercise. We didn't need to
put inter there. We can just write camera
blow exercise and save it. Perfect. So if this
we've come to the end of our exercise, see
you in the next one.
78. Exercise 19 - Halftone effect: Hey, guys, welcome back. We are going to be handling our next exercise in this video. So go ahead and open your file, and it's going to be this file. So this file, the name
is girl with hat. So bring in the file file. Just close this image. You just close this image. Now we're going to be using an effect called a
half tone effect. So lock your layer, go to filter, convert
for smart filters. Let's just look at
the image size. We're going to make
sure it's not too big. So we have this at
72 " and here at 48. So we want this to
be let's see 30 ". Let's see 2027, 27 will do. Perfect control zero to
bring in our image to view. Now, select your image
and go to filter. Then let's go to filter gallery. And we just want to
go to sketch, right? And then go to
half tune filters. Now, we see that we have
other filters which we added from previous videos. From our first video, I think, on getting started with filters. So these effects are still here because photo shop
remember our effects. So we can just select them and delete them because we
don't want to use them. Delete them. Now we only
have our half tone effects. That's perfect. Now we want
to zoom out for image. Let's basically close
this other ones, which we do not want
to use and focus on the half tone pattern. When I just increase my size, you're going to see what the
half tone is doing, right. We're basically turning our
image into dotted pattern. So we can increase the contrast. Not only dots, we
can also add lines. You can make it
lines to have this, and we can make it circles
to have this effect. But I'm going to
keep it at line, sorry at dots, and maybe
adjust our dot sizes. This size do just
fine. That's three. Three or five. Either of them. Let's choose five. I think. Let me see. 53 each one looks best. Let's go with three. So we are okay with
half two dots, and we can just get okay. Perfect. Now, I want to add one more thing
that's a gredM map. Okay? So go to your adjustments, and then add gradient
adjustment layer. Dent map adjustment layer. Click on this. Now we
have a gdent map added. But of course, we don't have any because gradient map
is black and white. And there's one thing guys
that I didn't tell you before adding this
half to effect. You have to make sure
your foreground and background are black
and white in order to achieve the
black and white mix because the have to effect will automatically take the color of your foreground
or your background. So as you can see my foreground and background are
black and white, so that's why I'm
having black and white. So if you have
different colors here, first of all, change these
colors to black and white. If not, you're going to be
having something different. So after this, we can
just add our dent filter. Or rather our gradient map. So let's com use and see. We can just go through
them one by one. See which one we might like. So this one is cool. Is also part. Remember we can adjust
our colors, right? So it's not going to be big
de choose anyone and then choose the colors we
want if we didn't want the colors, ts. So we can see that
some of these ones are kind of negative, negative, I mean, of having this
look get having this look. Instead of look like
maybe this one. Yeah, instead of
look like this one. Get having this. So let's see pinks. I'm just going to
choose this guy and make my color darker. Let's make the darker color der this particular color darker. You see the darker we make it, the more contrast
our image becomes. So this level of darkness
would you just fine? We can adjust different sliders. We can change the
colors if we want. Maybe play with these
other colors bits. Effect, and now we have
our half tune effect. If you want, we
could have a text, say in half tune or
whatever we want. We have pros. So we've come to the end of our
exercise on half tune. See you in the next one. Bye.
79. Exercise 20 – Turning image into artwork with filters: Hello, welcome back.
This exercise, we're going to be
turning our image into an artwork by adding
several filters. We're going to be adding
several filters to our image, and we're going to be doing
a lot of free styling to turn our image
into an artwork. Go ahead and open your image, and for this one, we're going
to be using this image. Once again, con our image, and then close our
half ton object. First things first, check the image size because
we do not want to be surfing our computer
and wasting our time. Let's change this
to let's see 35. Let's see. Let's
see 35. 35 should. Perfect, C zero, Unlock our Lia, then convert our La
into smart object. So let's go to filter,
the filter gallery. We can see that the last
filter effect was added right. That's the half tone filter. That's not what we want. I look incredibly good on this image. But that's what we want to
create for now. Let's see. We can do, but that's
not what we want to do. So just go out. First of all, we want to add the cut go to cut
out. Let's see. So these are cut out effect. You can see number of levels. See the effect you're basically achieving by
understanding this guys. Let's with this, um This four wouldn't be bad. Four doesn't look bad
for numbers of levels. We could use four,
we could use five. And we can actually
come back to change, so it's not going to
be a pro. We have cut. Let's add another
one. Let's add a f green. Let's see here. We have the fing green here
or the fing green here, and then let's do this. We can see the effect of
fingers hide you can see it before and we can
actually move the positions. You can see it's
turning out the ions or cut out to the below
our finger effect. Let's see what we can do with the highlighted areas
or highlight areas. Intensity. Perfect. Now, I want to
add one more filter, at least one more filter. I don't like the w I O it looks now by adding
this extra fil green. I'm just going to add the new filter and have
two fin green filters. This one we're going
to use, let's see. Poster edges. Let tri poster edges. Made L et's see the be fun of. Yeah, let me just hit okay. Okay and let's see what
we've turned our image into. Let me try adding of this sky. That oil pints. Let's see what we're going
to have. Doesn't look. See. For a lot of these
things, you just have to keep trying to trial and error. You have to just see
what works best, try and see what works best. You get what works
best, you keep it. It's basically trial and error. Sometimes. Perfect. Let's come to S for artwork. Artwork exercise and safe. Perfect. So have come to
the end of our video. You can see how we have totally turned our image
into an artwork. So that's it for this one.
See you in the next one. Hi.
80. Exercise 21 – Create motion effect with blur: Hello, welcome
back. And this one. We are going to be adding
Motion B to our image. So go ahead and open your image. So o I building this
image of guy Ron. So guy Ronin. Open. Now we can close our arctic. Now we have this image
of a gon, and really, we don't need to
reduce the image size because the blow effect doesn't take so much
tool on our computer. So on Lock, my layer, then turn this into a smart object or combat
for smart filters. Okay. So what I want to do
is conf G to duplicate this, and then just hide this one. And for this guy, I'm
going to put my filters, go to blow, and go
to motion blow. So I need to be
adding a motion flow. Now we want to create an
illusion of this guy run. So we want to give it speed. So for this effect, the more the distance, that the more you increase
the distance, the faster it will seem that our character is running
or subject is running. So the lower the distance, the less the speed you get. Of course, you don't want
to make it this high because he's not
an ero clean yet, so he can run this fast. So you just want to do it
moderately, maybe this much. Maybe this much there. What we need to do next is
to cut out our character. So we just go to our object selection and
just click on our object. Must be a perfect selection. We agree to modify
our selection. So this is just our selection, and what we want to do just create our layer mask
from our selection. This is what we
have. Now we have our guy and basically have. Now, we can actually select a a mask and feather
it out a bit. We can just add the B of Fedn bit of Fedrin, K or note. Basically depends
on what the wants. Yeah, so this will do
this much failure. I be just perfect. Now, on the edges, we can see that we're having
some redness on our edges, right because of glove. So we can just hit C
for the crop to and just p shift and
click and p shift. So we can grow and it. I think this is just perfect. It's now looking to see if
our guy is running very fast. Let's try even
increasing the blow. You can see what we get. The higher the
distance, the faster, the speed, or the faster
our character is. Okay? So 180 will be just fine. And can see Running guy
or let's see Motion L. Exercise. And s. Okay. Perfect. Now, that's start
for this exercise. And see you in the
next one. Bye bye.
81. Homework: Hello, and welcome
back. So this is an assignment of homework, so you have to just open the folder and choose
either of these images, A image from here. You choose this one, you
can choose this one, you can choose or you can
choose multiple images, you get and I just want you to create effect filter effects, to add filter effects
to these images. You can turn some of them into
artworks like we saw from the last video or from the video where we turned our
image into an artwork. You can apply
multiple filters to turn your image into artworks. I just want you to create
different effects. Get different artworks as much as you can. Get
as much as you can. You can use multiple field tasks different from the ones
we used from that video. I just want you to basically
explore the field task, and please share your
results with me. I'd love to see what you come up with to see you in the
next one. Bye bye.
82. Module Introduction: In this module, you learn how to retouch photos
in ADB Photoshop. You'll learn how to
use the removed two, the Patch two, the
content A Move two, the spot healing tools,
the red eye two, the bone, Dodge,
and sponge tools, all in our DUB Photoshop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue, and please reach out
to me via message or in the Q and E section, if
you have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
83. How to remove from an image – The remove tool in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome back. So in this video, we're
going to go ahead and start learning how to retouch
using the remove tool. So go ahead and click open, and go to your folder, that's the image retouching
and enhancing folder. So we're going to bring
in a couple of images. Let's select this guy, H down Control and
select this guy, that's the castle image, the rock in a image. And let's also select this
guy, girl dancing image. Let's have all of them open. And the image removed
to the removed tool is a pretty new to to
retouching in photoshop. If you check older
versions of Photoshop you find this two.
The tool is here. You come to this place, click and hold, and you're
going to see this tool. It's called the Remove tool.
Click on the Removed tool. And of course, the
shortcut is G. That's same for every other tool here. This is the removed tool. Now, what this tool does is, it fills in the space. We paint over. Get it automatically fills in
the space, we paint over. So it's footage of
ding its magic. Once more. When you
select the removed to, you can just select your
background or your image. And these are just
the options you get. We have sample all layers. For sample all layers, It means we can actually paint on our background
layer if we want. Or we can create a new layer
and paint on our new layer, and then it's going
to work we get, so it's going to work on
our new layer and won't affect our background layer or our mean image permanently. So let me give you an example. Let's see, I want to just
check sample all layers. So check sample all layers and then select your background. And now we are working on
our background, right? So let's paint over this place. So pint gently over this
clots and this fruits. So when you're done, you just release your mouse, and Fodo is going
to remove the area and fill it with parts
of the rock you get. Now this is what we now have. We see that pudo be able
to remove the area, even though we have some
repetition of patterns, we get, but this is something
we can also further edit. That's not a problem.
Now what I wanted to see is now look at our layer. Our layer is
completely distorted. Right? It's completely changed. Whatever we had on the rocks are completely
gone and gone forever. So we can't go back. Let's say we export this image. We can actually go back and have our original image. We get. So we don't want
to be working on our main layer using
this remove too. So to bring back our
image our original image. So we now have our
original image. So in order to work not
on our original image, so as not to permanently
change our original image, we can create a new layer, and then sample our layers. It's going to create a
change on our new layer, and then our original layer
will not be affected. So now let's try doing
it on the new layer. Spin over this place. Gently. And also make sure
you capture the shadows. Perfect. Now watch what it does. Okay, we forgot to
select this please also. Let's just paint. So it has totally removed our object
and we have this newer. Let's hide our background layer and see what it
did with our Nula. We can see that it created
this pattern on our ner, and then filled it on
our ba ground layer. Now, if we just hide this, our background layer
is still intact. With this, we can also
just paint over here to create more changes so that we don't have just this
very even pattern. We cannot bad, quite manageable. Let's go to the next image
and that's this image. Now, we want to remove this
castle from our image. We're going to create
a new layer and then make sure sample
all layers is on, just paint over my castle. For this image, because of how complex the whole thing is, we might have to go back and forth a bit to achieve
the ideal look. We can see that our
castle has been removed, and he didn't do a really bad job because I was thinking we have
a lot of repeating patterns here because of how
the castle was occupying. But for the shop did
a pretty good job. Maybe we just need to
clean a bit of this area. I need done. And I want to just undo it because I'm seeing
too much repeating pattern. Yeah. Let me do that. And I think this is better. Better. Yeah. So I'm
just going to paint here also and remove this
rock. Look here. Yeah. So wouldn't say
it's 100% perfect, but it does the
job. Does the job. And for this tool, you
don't want to be using images that are
too complex, okay? So let's go to the next image,
which is this gel dance. Now, for this one, we
might be having we might have a bit of problems,
some little problems. Let's just create our Nula and then pin over our dancing girl. Perfect. Now, we see the
gale has been removed but we have some two problems here. This line that comes from up. We can see that it
wasn't replaced, right, there is an
empty space here, and we can see there is a
bit of we awkward look here. This is one of the
lit two issues you might get with this two. We can go further on
to use the metods of retouching and to make
sure they look realistic. This is just to show you
that sometimes we might get not perfect results
with these two. So that's just the
removed tool for you. It's very simple tool. It's a pretty new tool in for the shop but it
does amazing job. Okay, it does an amazing job. Let's just remove this hat
and see. Yeah, it looks good. That's basically it
for the removed tool, see you in the next video. Bye.
84. The patch tool in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, welcome back. And this one, we're going to be
learning the patch tool. Go ahead and open your image. For this patch tool, we're
going to be using this girl. Click on this image
and also this image. Click on this two image, the smiling, that's brown ted, and then girl with pip. Maybe even this image. Pen. Let's close
these other ones. We don't want to see them. Perfect. So this patch to is a bit similar to the
last two we look at, which is the remove two. Only that you have
to select the area. You have to mark you
select the area. And then after you
select the area, you kind of have to
move the area to the place where you want to patch that particular
area of it. Yes, so you just move
it and the fot blends the whole thing for you. You
see that's how it works. You just select the
area, then move the foots blends the
whole thing for you. So that's a bit similar
to the pervious two Even though in the previous photoshop does the inge of all you
need to do is just paint, and you don't need to
move and the photoshop in its intelligence does
the feeling for you. But for this one, you have to select and then click and move. The photoshop will now do the blending for you.
I is pretty simple. So the blending sometimes
might not be very perfect, so you have to kind of be
patching it with areas that you know are of the same pattern and
basically similar in look. For this part, you want
to you just move it here, even though it's not perfect. So for places like this that
have patterns like this, it's going to be hard
to use the patch tool. You just want to be
patching areas like this. Get where you can
just move here and it's patched.
Little two changes. Little two changes, work
best for the patch tool. For bigger areas like the G. I want to let's try
the removed two. Let's try removing
this please and see. The Remove two should
do a better job. Yeah, we see that the removed
two does a better job here because Pots hop had to calculate and know that there is a pattern here and for it to
be realistic, it has to flu. Photoshop did the whole
calculations for us, unlike the patch to which we have to do the
calculations ourselves. This one might not
work really well. Let see. Basically,
that's the patch two, the patch tool for this image, we just and grog. We see. Sometimes the blending
might not be perfect, like we can see here. The patch tool is
pretty much limited. It's not as powerful as
the remove image two. So that's the patch to for you. The next one we're going
to be learning about the content of move to. See you there. To
85. The content aware move tool in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome back. So in this video,
we're going to be learning how to use
the content A move to. This tool is also
under this category. So this is the content
Aware Move to. It's also a pretty new
tool in Photoshop. So what this thing does is, you have to mark
you select around an area and then move the area. So then ok. Then we
see what it does now. The footage of moves
the area for us, but we see that
sometimes it's not really the blending is
not really perfect, so we might need to kind of
blend it with other tools. But basically, that's
what this tool does. And we can do this for
even parts like the eye. Let's want to move the eye. Let's want to move the eye
bit to the side. Click. You can see that it does
the blending for us. But we might need to
kind just go in and tidy up this blending to be better. It means we can move the entire eye somewhere else, right? Let's see done. We can see that covered this
please, covered this please. So basically, that's
what this does. You can move That's what it does, basically. And we also have these
moods where you can add to your selection subtract from your selection intercept, just like how we saw when using the select to when
learning about selection. We also have this which
individuals to expand. Now let's Let's see to select, then to change it to expand. It creates a copy. This is
the original copy we had. So it didn't move it, but it
just created another copy. So we could have
another copy here. Okay? When we have it the extent, it just creates more copies
of our selected areas. It means if we have
it on the extent and we select our I here. It's not going to
replace this piece. It's going to just
create a copy. Basically, that's what it does. It just creates a copy of our. It's either on the
extent or move. You either move it or extend it. And that'll be it
for this video. See you in the next one. Bye.
86. Retouch with the spot healing & healing brush tools in Adobe Photoshop CC: There, welcome back.
In this video, we're going to be learning
how to retouch using our spot healing and
healing grouch tools. So go ahead and
open your folder. And for this one, we are going to choose a couple of images. Let's select this image,
pull down Control, and select this image, and also this image. Open. Perfect. So
we are learning how to use what we call
a spot healing brush, and also the healing brush too. So let's start with the
spot healing brush. Now what does the
spot healing bush do? What it does is,
it heals our spot. Let's undo this and then
create a new layer so that we do our changes
on our new layer. So sample all layers, and we can see that it gives us this thing that
looks like a brush, and then we can increase the size or reduce the
size, the hardness. Also can be increased. I'm just going to make the
hardness 64 and the size 87, and then start to
follow my spots. We can see that my
spots are disappearing. I'm now retouching
my image clean out my spots with this two. Perfect. So we can see with
just a couple of clicks, we've been able to totally
remove the spots on her face. Now, of course,
these are the spots. These are the spots
on our layer one yet, so we can hide them
and hide them. Perfect. Now we come
to this image also, and let's just make
our brush bigger with the square bracket
keys, and then sample. Maybe I should create a new
layer also sample all layers. And we can we don't
want to do this too much because gate start
looking thick at some point. Perfect. So for
places like this, M work. Let's try. He it worked, but
still we have we. I'm going to do this
and use a defer to. Let's. It's going to take
some time, but it definitely going
to do a better job. Perfect. You he did
a better job even though the skin looks
quite like a fabric, but the spots are gone, right? The spots are gone.
Problem. And we can also use other tools, right? We can use other tools. You don't have to
depend on on this guy. So let's try the healing
brush tom and see. So for the healing bush tom, you have to first of
all, sample an area. So you have to select the brush
with the healing brush to and then pull down and click on an area you like to sample. You have to choose a clear area. So let's pll down
and click here. So sample this area
and intro click, and it's going to
gradually fill in blemish. I want to sample
this because it's c to this place. In color. So sample again with an odd
sample and then odd sh. So this is how to use this other two of the spf area and then. Sample area and sha Perfect. This will also work on an
image like this. Sam proof. Or use your sport healing too. What we get. But we can
see that he didn't do a very good job all the
time, or the last time. I just di it and we did it. So it's now better. We have some unevenness here. So I'll just undo this and maybe make my approach smaller. Yeah, it's better now. S guys how to remove blemishes
on our images. It's bring this smaller. And you know what, I want to
just start this guy again. I want to use all the tools we've
learned so far to remove the blemishes on
this wooden image. But I want to have a background on which all my
changes will be done. Yet. So let's remove the
blemishes on this wood. Let's go ahead and
start with the tool. So let's try to remove
the big guys here. Pint over them and wait
for photoshop magic. And the size of the
image also matters. That's why you
don't want to pick an image that's too big. The image is too big, it's
going to take time to feel. The smaller the image, the faster the effect will work out. Okay. So our retouching
has been completed. Now let's do also for this pot. So let's just paint over this please and allow foot
shop to do its magic. Perfect. Now, let's do
same for the guys here. Paint over blemishes. Even though it's a perfect, but we can now use other tools to basically
make our work perfect. Let's use this one, which
is the healing brush. Let's now start
attacking the spots. Some of them, this one, we'll just attack them. Okay. I've done a
great job here. I don a few job. It's this one. So for this one, I just want to e
I want to use M. Make the brush smaller and
then pints over it. Perfect. Now, we see that
we've been able to turn our wood from this to this. Let me see with us
would be blemishes. Perfect. Perfect. So you
can see how we've used the retouching tools to totally remove our blemishes
for this image. And with this, we've
come to the end of our video, see you
in the next one.
87. Remove red eye – The red eye tool in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, guys, welcome
back. In this video, we're going to learn
a very quick one. That's removal of red eye. So let's go ahead and open our folder and
bring in this image. Bold red eye. Bringing
in this image. Perfect. Now, this is our image. And sometimes this occurs. This red eye thing occurs
when we take photos, right? So if you are a
digital photographer, you probably know this. Sometimes you might
find that the eye is red after you've taken all the pictures and
you want to edit. Now, it's a tooth
here in photoshop. Still under the
retouching tools. Now, we have the red eye on these two helps
move our red eye. All you need to do is
to select the two, and then click on the red eye. Now, our red eye is gone. Click on the red eye,
and our red eye is gone. Very simple. And we can
see our image if we want. But we're not going to
see. Yeah. So that's it for the red eye two and see you in the
next one. Bye bye.
88. Retouch eye and teeth – The burn, dodge and sponge tools in Adobe Photoshop CC: Okay, welcome back.
And this one, we're going to be
learning how to retouch the eyes and the teeth. So go ahead and click open. Your folder and you're
going to choose this image that's
the colored eyes, and this image,
that's the Asian boy. Finally, this image, that's the smiling and brown
teeth. And click open. You can see that this image
has brown teeth, right? This image is an
image of a red eye. This one has red eyes also. The eyes are not
really looking good. These are just what we're
going to learn how to fix, and we have tools
to help us do that. We have three tools
to do this for us in the photo shop.
You'll have to come here. You see that we
have the Doug two, and we have the born two. We have the sponge two. So the Dodge to makes
things brighter. Let me just in pace the size of my brush, square brackets. If I click here on this piece,
You're going to see that. It's becoming brighter, right? That's the Dutch tool for you. It makes things
brighter, and we use it a lot in retouching images. I'm just doing contri to
undo what I just did. And now when you
select the tool, that's the Dutch tool, you're going to have
where it says ringe we have mites, shadows
and highlights. Now, you're just going to
select what you want to fix. You want to fix the mid tones. Mit tones are between
the highlights, which are the bright
and the shadows. You shadows are the darker ts. So it's fixing the shadows. And you either choose shadows
or met tones or highlights. Then you choose the exposure, what 50 is perfect, and then you have what you
call the protect toons. So if you protect tones, you're going to protect
the tune of your image, and get So basically, that's what these options do. So we have, sorry, not the blow. We have the Dutch two,
we have the bond two, and the bond tool also has the same options because it's basically the opposite
of the Dutch two. So if we come here, we be increased of bush
size and pinned over here, we see that the
touch tools which in the side lack, right. The touch tool does
or a bond two does. And we have the sponge on
this ponche to saturate, our image will desaturate
parts of our image. So we have the mood, we have desaturate,
and we have saturate. So desaturate means
it's going to make the colors feed out get
desaturating this part. And so you know I'm
gradually turning it into the black and white image. That's the desaturate, and
we also have the flow, which should be left at 50%, and we have this which
you shouldn't mess with. Basically, you
should choose either saturate or the saturate
when using this two. Saturate. It's going to make It's going to bring
back our colors, not really bring
back our colors, but it's going to
make our colors pop out more, as you can see. They are not just used for
doing stuff like this, that's working on images. They can be used also
for other stuff. You can use them to add
shadows, add highlights, add mid tones to our images, so we can use them
to fix shadows also. So let's select our Dog to
and start with this image. So we want to make
our teeth right. First thing you want
to do is reduce the hardness of your bg. So you want our
broche to be quite soft and just adjust the
size to size you want. No you can start
clicking on the teeth. You can see that
we're brightening up our teeth gradually, right? So you don't want to a this. You can adjust the be size
pais the square brackets. O So now we're
brightening up our teeth, but we still have
that brownness. One thing we can do is you can use what we call the sponge to. So that ponche to just
desaturates our teeth. So you o de saturate
and start painting on parts of our teeth
to desaturate it. So it's going to kind
of that brownness. He's going to really it natural. And again you don't overdo
this it doesn't look fake. O Okay, so we've been able
to fix our teeth. You're not going to bring
in the image one more time to file pla embedded, then bring in this image. So I can compare
before and after. This is before t
and this is after. I can see that it a bit too, but you get the point. This is before, and this
is she really white. We're done with this
one. We've been able to whiten up our girls teeth here. Yeah, we now move
to the next one. Let's look at colored ice. The same method works
for the colored ice. We can be saturated
with a sponge. You just have to sat click on these areas that are too red. But I have to wings. Click on them using
our sponge to. We're going to saturate. T s. C maybe even this down part so? Perfect. Now we want to brighten
things up a bit. You take a doch tube
and brighten things up. You don't overdo it, just a bit. Perfect. Then you also
want to brighten up the inside of our eyes
that's this part, and we brighten it up a bit so so that it pops
out even more. Let's just bring in our
original image and compare. We can see this is
before and this is after before. We've done with this. We've done with our teeth. Now, let's work on this point. So I'm just going
to take my tool. Here's my too. These on my toes. I'm going to take my sponge
to and satate the ice. Also this pat. Perfect. D same with this pat. Like I said, you
don't want to overdo this in so that
it looks neutral. And we can also do
some with the ****. Yeah, our image looks
better instantly. So let's take our touch to
and brighten things a bit. So I want to brighten this part. So that the eye pops out
more, brighten this part. So we can see that
it's looking quite, but you get my point. Stands out, makes
the eye stand out. So I'll brighten this part I don't with my pro
size one more time. See this one. One
more time here. And also my teeth,
just a bit. Perfect. Now, our effect is
a bit too much, but if we compare it
with the original, you'll see that we
still did a great job. You'll see this is before, and this is after before and
after. Before and after. Perfect. So, guys, that's it
for be touching our eyes in our teeth here in
foot I'm not going to see this one because
this is quite simple. I to everything and see
you in the next one.
89. Homework: So in this assignment,
you are required to do retouching for an image. So click open to open your
folder and you see this image, the smiling girl retouching. So that's your image. So you have to fix the image. You have to work on the
blemishes on the skin, you have to work on the teeth, you have to work on the eyes. So you have to use
everything you've learned in this module to
bring this image to life. Okay. So just do this and
share your results with me. I'd love to see what
you come up with. Okay, so that's it for this one. See you in the next one.
90. Module Introduction: In this module, you learned about brushes in a
two B photo shop. You'll learn how to use book
default and custom brushes, and you'll also learn the
different brush settings available in A to B Photo shop. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue, and please reach out
to me via message or in the Q and E section if
you have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next do.
91. Getting started with brushes in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey guys, welcome
back. In this module, we'll be learning about brushes. And in this video,
we're going to be having an introduction
into brushes. And of course, I know you're a bit familiar with
brushes because we've been using brushes since the
beginning of this course, even though we've not
covered it officially. So we've been using brushes
to paint over masks, and yeah, you are pretty much familiar
with the interface. So let's go ahead and
create a new file. And this time, our file
will be a bit bigger. Not going to be the
eight by eight, usual eight by eight, it's
going to be a DP guy. So I'm using 11 by
8.5 " at 300 PPI. So just create this file. And now we have our interface. Come and select the brush tool, the brush too, you know,
and the shortcut is B. So if you select the brush too, you already know that
when you right click, you're going to get this
interface where you can select the brush preset. And then choose the size
and the hardness, right? So let's select this guy and we see that we can
choose the size, we can choose the hardness. This will increase or
decrease the hardness, this will increase or
decrease the size. Yeah, that's really basic stuff. And these are the
default brushes. In case you do not
have these ones, or you're not seeing them, you can come here to this gear icon and then
a pen default brushes. Click on a Pen default
brushes and click OK. If you click OK, it's going to bring in the default brushes. You can also access
the settings here. Now you can see that
they are in groups. We have the general brushes. You can click and open, close. You have the dry media brushes, the wet media brushes, and special defects brushes. So now, one thing you can also do is common routt your bruh. So you didn't cover this before, so you can routet your brush
at the angle of your brush. But this is something
you can also do under brush settings, even though we're not looking at bruh brush settings for now. So we have the brush panel. I know that you won't be having these panels because we've
not been using them. You probably are using
the essential panel. So you just want to come to your windows and then
come and click on brushes. Okay so click on brushes, and you're going to have
the interface open. Now it's basically similar
to what we just covered. Only that it has
the settings here. Okay. Let's look at some
options we get with our brushes on the
properties bar. Of course, this is
the option to open your brush settings or
close your brush settings. And then we have
the bland modes. We have the bland modes, and we look at bland
modes before so you can create a layer and
then start painting. And then you can blend your
layer with the layer below. Because we have dissolved. We have now you can see
the effect of dissolve. We have behind, we have play. We have Darken see the effect. We just have all plan modes. You have difference.
Now difference will paint the
difference of the color. Let's see we want
to delete this die. Let's delete this and
then create a new layer. Now let's select white
instead of black. So we are painting
white on a new layer. So we see that pint. Click, click, click and
drag, click and drag. Inside that we painting white. So it's basically
painting the difference of our color over
and over again. So basically, that's
one needle thing you could achieve with ruse. And we could just add ingredients to this
or color to this, and then you can use
it as a background. It's an abstract background. But this, by the
way, the next thing you have to look at
here is the opacity. Let's change the bend
move back to normal, and let's hide this layer with the new layer, so
have the opacity. Now the opacity of course you
know is the transparency. That's how visible or how
transparent our bruh is. So you can pint. Let me change the color. Let's take it to red. Pints. You can see that our brush
stroke is 13% opaque, right? Poten percent Vcb. So we can keep painting
and see the effect. Okay, now we can hit this guy to allow our drain tablet
control our opacity. That's if you have
a drain tablet. So I have a drain
tablet connected. If you do not have
a draint tablet, it's not a problem, you can
see paint with a mouse, even though there are
some little options, just like this one, which
you won't be able to access. And we're don to experiment
drawing with our mouse, s drawing with our tablet, so you can see the difference. Now we have this guy,
which we can turn on to enable us to control
the opacity, the pressure we apply
on our pin, right? So let's take our act back
100. And then we have the flu. No flu is simply the
intensity of our brush. L et's see. We have it at 56. This is the intensity at 56. Or let me just do one stroke. This is the intensity at 56. Let's take it back to 100. This is not the intensity. So we can see that
this one is more intense, than this one. Let me just bring them back
so that we can try it at 6%. So we can see that it's
very less intense. It's quite similar to opacity, but really the same. So that's the flue for you. We now have the smoothing and
the smoothing controls how smooth our paintings are or our draws are
using the brush tool. Now, this option might give you a bit of lag
on your brush tool. So it might give you a bit
of lug on your brush to, but it smoothens
up your drawing. So let's see, I have
I have grain to draw. So I'm trying to write a
tree that us in my mouse. And drawing with mouse can be
very unpleasant sometimes. Now, if you take your
smoothing to say 60% or 70 or 53% or 57% rather
and try to do the same, you're going to see that
we get more smoothness. You get fo kind of
intervening and then making our
growing smoother. So all our mistakes
which are visible here are not visible
on this guy here. If I do it again, with
my smoothing at zero, you see all my mistakes,
all my changes, you get, but when I take my
smoothing to 100, it might lag, but I get a
smoother more perfect rowing. So that's what
smoothing does for you. And then we have
these estimates, you should not really
worry about them. Then we have the angle, which you should not really
worry about again. And then we have this guy. Now, this guy
enables our tablets, control the size
of our brush tip. So let's try Now, we
have it on, right? Now I'm going to use
my tablet to draw, or I'm going to use
my mouse to draw. Let me just delete this guy. And then also use
my tablet to draw. So create anular. Now I'm using my mouth to draw. I'm using my mouth
to draw, right. Now you can see what I've been able to achieve with my mouse, even with my
smoothing at 100 and also with my brush pressure on. Even though my mouse is not
going to recognize this because my mouse is
not a drawing tablet. Let me now use my drain tt to draw so that you
see the difference. Now I'm using my drawing tablet. Now you can see that I'm having different sizes of my brush tip, depending on the
pressure I'm applying. You see I'm applying
little pressure right now. I'm having very thin bruh size. I'm applying much pressure
right now. You can see. So my brush size is increasing. To pressure, size,
much pressure, much size, pressure,
size. You get. But for the mouse, we don't get this option, right? So now that's because this option is on
and because I have my grain tablet.
Connected. You see? We're going to try paint with
different other brushes, so you can see the effect
of a drawing tablet. Let me just of this layer
and create a new one. Now we're going to see this guy. This is called symmetry. This allows us to
draw in symmetry. Let's try the vertical symmetry. If you click on vertical,
you're going to have a vertical line and you
can recite the line, you can rotate the line. You can do whatever you
want with the line. You know that the line will
control your symmetry. If you click, and
then try to draw now, I'm using my pen to draw. We can see that I'm basically drawing the same thing
on the other side. That's the symmetry for you. You can use this to really
create incredible art. I'm going to change my symmetry. Let's change our symmetry. Let's have the t the horizontal is just the
opposite of the vertical. So let's have two axis so I see what we get with our axis. Okay, I'm just going to
rescue my symmetrical axis, and then start to draw. I'm having basically the same
thing being grown all over. On all four axis. That's how this other guy works. Now, let's try one of the one, which is the Mandala, and Mandala enables
you to allows you to put in the
number of segments. Let's see six segments.
This is what we now have. Let's rescale this guy. P down holes and
re scale him and. Let's try growing now. And people use this to create
really incredible patterns. Incredible art patterns. So that's what we
get with this guy. Create a new layer
and of our symmetry. We can off our symmetry
so we don't use symmetry. These are the options we
get on the properties bar. And now let's come
to our brushes. Now we can see that here also, we can the size of our brush. We can adjust our bruh. Now let's open this guy. Click here. P. Let's just expand this
brush panel like this. Now you see that Pod
shop has been able to recognize that I have
my grand tablet connected. We see that these brushes, these brush presets are
pressure brush presets. So do only work with
a pressure pain. It means I can now grow with my pressure pain while
selecting this brush presets. Now I can see that I am able to control
the thickness with my pen. You go did this. So I just created a new layer, so let's continue experimenting. Now we've been able
to use these brushes, the pressure pen brushes,
and there are lots of them. Let's try out the ones.
Let's let this guy, and we can see the effect
we get this one, right? I just undid that. Let me try writing something.
Something serious. I'll just reduce
the size of my pen. And basically, your pressure
pen is just another mouse. I just another mouse with a pen. So right now, I'll
write something. I write beautiful. Uh, So we can see that this isn't too good. But we can see that it was
easy to create, right? That's because I used the pen. If we were to use our
mouth to create this, I'm sure I will not be able
to create something good. That's just a
demonstration for you. Now, we have other the preset. We have this guy. We have this
guy, this other category. Let's just hide a
in the nuclear. So we have this on the category, and this one is under
media bruh, right? This one is media bruh. So let's increase
the size of our bh. And come to our raw area. So we can see that it's also being our pressure
or pressure pain. So we can grow, can shed, we can sketch all little pain. We see the amsing effect
it's given us, right? We have this other guy Okay, this guy is an eraser
brush, or it's an eraser. If you see these little icons, you see that this is an eraser, this is a brush, this approach, this is a brush. And also if you
look at other ones, you'll see that some
of them are connected to certain tools, like the smoch tool, so you can use it as a bruh. You see, and this is the
history brush or the cooler. You can see that it's a cooler. We also have this guy, which are special defect. Now these ones were
created by Kyle. He's a very popular guy. He works with AB. Now, the guy creates
crazy brushes. He created some of
the best brushes we use as designers
or digitalis. He's now working with
S so he can have access to his brushes if
you have a subscription. And we're going
to look at how to get access to his library. That's in the advanced course. Key but in this because we are basically having a introduction. You can see what I'm able to
achieve by using this brush. Now, even though
it's a smug rush, even though it's a smart brush, we'll see the effect giving us. It's smudging on our pints to give us this
beautiful effect. These are some of
the things we could achieve with brushes. H. Now we're going to do
exercises also in this module. We're going to have exercises, so you see how to use these brushes in
very creative ways. I think that will
be it for this. That will be it
for this lecture. Le Let me create
a final drawing. It's not working. So I'm trying to create
it drain but I don't know why it's not working. Maybe an error occurred. Okay. Sorry. It's
on my smog tool, right, so I have to take
it back to my purse too. So select my guy back.
Now we see it's you. Let's try writing F to shop. Full to shop is best. But that's that for Brushes, this will come to the
end of our lecture on introduction to Brushes. So on the next video, I'm going to go a little bit deeper to see you
in the next one. Bye bye.
92. Brush settings and custom brushes in Adobe Photoshop CC: Here, welcome back.
And this one, we're going to be looking
at brush settings, and we're going to be exploring
also some custom brushes. So create new file. Create. Let's take our brush to and then go to
our brush settings. Okay. But first of
all, I want to just import some brushes,
which I downloaded. So you can have some experience with using
custom meat brushes. So these are free brushes
you can get online. So go ahead and click inputs. In a click input
and then come to the folder to the
brushes folder. Now we're going to see
all these brushes. We have about one, two, three, four, five, six, seven of them. So we have to actually go in. You can just select
the folders like that. Go in to each of
them, and click load. So go again inputs. We go to the second one load. Okay, so let's just do
that for the remaining. So we have all our
brushes loaded. So we see that our
special custom brushes are from here to here. Yeah, so these are
our custom bushes. We can open them to see the
various effects we get. So these are spree brushes. Let me just select this one
and then and then pint. So we see what effect this
brush gives us, right? That's the spree brush. So I'm going to
create a new layer, so I don't paint
on my background. And let's see this guy, see what it gives us. And we can see that
our flu is 38%, right. So let's take our flute 100. We see that were having
the full version of it. These are our spray brushes. And we're going to use
some of these brushes to create a really
credibly effects. We see that this one looks
like like a dripping blood, you can go in, maybe add pave. You can see how much we add, we are now adding to our brush by just adding
the paving effect. Soften our brush, the size. Arches, take it a smooth or
H arches or Soft Chester. Yeah. Now we see that
we can go in and furthermore do
incredible changes to make our effective better. We see all of this. All of these are
bruhs, free for you. Now we have this other one, these are painter brushes, what we gets for painters
for digital painters. We're going to have you achieve really realistic pin strokes. We see what we are achieving
this particular brush. So I won't be able to
go rough all of them. But go through as
much as we can. So you can change the color. We will add to our painting. Maybe we will change
the plan you multiply. See hot light. You can see the beautiful effects
were aching our bushes. M this blue pins. Darken. T. We have other ones. Let's just close these ones. We have the spree brushes to. Sa pre bruh. So these are. They are just like spray. They just like a spray. We can change the blend
mode color bone. Then we change the bh. The bush size. We
change the color. This Perfect. Now, there
are lots of them. Let's try that last one. Let's see now. Okay? So maybe I'll just
change the color. Perfect. Now there are lots
of them. We won't be able to go
through all of them, so you can just go
through the remaining. C for yourself. Have these guys on the GF X pins on this particular one is
the fog, pin fog physically. They are really
realistic, realistic. And we have this guy adjust
dashes, disguise a dashes. Let's change our color. See what you do. If you doing, you see dashes, right?
This is what we get. You come with really
incredible settings so that you paint, you get a different
tition of your bruh. All of these effects can be
adjusted on under settings. To the setting based changes. So basically, these are the brush peaches
are halfway use so you can go ahead
and use them, and we're going to use some
of them in our exercises. So we're going to
create a nuclear. We will hide this one and then now look at the brush settings. I'm going to select my hard
rounded pressure size here. Good bh settings. Now bush settings
are incredible. Okay. There are lots of settings we can do
for our brushes. First of all, we have
the brush tip shape, which basically
allows us to select the bh the bush tip.
Particular brush tip. We can select it. We
have a preview here, a direct review of what
we're going to get. So let's just stick this guy, this very basic guy. We can see a preview of what we will do of what
we will get if we just do a simple
drawing like this. But of course, we're not getting that because I'm not
using my pen presently. Let me just use my
pen so we can see. S, just go my pressure. We get the point. It
tells us that we can use pressure to adjust the tips. Let me just select normal one. I'm selecting this one
without the pressure. It's not show me though. So but you get the point. This preview tells
us what we get. And now, this is the size, how soon we can
see that our brush previews of dting as we
adjust the settings, so we can flip X of flip Y. We can reteat our brush. Okay. And this is a round brush, so you won't really
see the rotation. But if we choose this
guy, for example, rotate, you're going to see that it's routing because it's
not a round brush. We go back to our round brush, and we also can
adjust the roundness. Okay? We can use this to adjust the roundes we
can just drag pen in, and we are basically
adjusting our roundness. Then try drawing with this one. Now, we see that this looks
like a calgraphic pen, right? Because we have
adjusted our roundness. Caligraph pens, usually
have this shape, this kind of oval shape. So by adjusting
our roundness and maybe tilting it to this angle. We have been able to
achieve a calligraphic pen. I'm just going to
create a new layer, so we can basically experiment
our caligraphic pen. Let me just reduce
the size of my brush, come back and type something
and write something. Let's see C graphy. I think graph should
have Calligraphy phi. Be able to turn our normal brush into a Caligraphic brush. But that's the way. Let's take it back
and we have angle, and we saw how we just
change the angle. That's on the bruh. Let's go to scattering. No, not cutting, let's go
back to brush tip size. We have what we call spacing.
I think cover spacing. Now spacing is the space between the brush points,
the brush points. We have to understand
that this brush is a round brush, right? Now, because of so many round brush rooks together,
packs together. We now have a brush rook
that looks like this. But if we have
space between them, we're just going to
have a round brush ok. So that's what
Spacing does for us. I'm going to keep my
spacing like this, so we can experiment
other settings. So we have the ship dynamics. Now this enables us to
control the pressure. And as you can see, it's
set to pressure pen. And then the ita. Now, I'm just going to
keep changing the setting so we can see what we get here. This is the ita changes the arrangement of
our brush strokes. Then we have itagle
roundness ita also. I basically gives variations
to our roundness. Okay. So we have scattering. Now, this will be able
to scatter our bruh. Se we are trying to
create a dust brush. This will come really
handy because we want to scatter the particles very much. So we also have the
scat account and see what we get with our
scatter accounts. And count jitter. It also creates variations
under our counts. If we come here and those paint and see what we are getting. This was a normal
smooth brush at first. We can this normal
wood brush at first, but what we get. We have the texture which
adds texture to our brush. We can choose texture here. Of course, we've looked
at textures before. We can invert our
texture and pre scale, but we're not going to look at every option on the texture, so I'm just going to check
texture and we have brush. These boss add another
brush to our brush. Yet basically joins
the two brushes, and then we can paint with
the both of them at once. If I uncheck this, you
see that the preview goes back to our
numeral brushes. We have the color dynamics, which bus to change our color. So we could change the hue. You can see that now because
of our color dynamics, we are basically changing the color of our
strokes so we can see. We are painting really colorful particles,
with the setting. Now, we can of course increase
a huge guitar or reduce it the saturation Gita also, also increase or
decrease the saturation. You can see that it's physically creating this cool effect. And given the brightness and the purity, then we
have the transfer. And the transfer will
include our opacity and also our flu and we looked
at ac and flu all the time. They are controlled
by our pressure pen. Then we have the brush pulls. We have the noise, which
inviers add noise to our brush. So with this once we
can't make changes, we can just select
them or deselect them. So basically, this is what you
get with a brush settings. So I don't spend
too much time here. Now you can go ahead and
reset your settings. We can reset our settings
and get our settings back. So basically, does this
for the brush settings, and also for our brush presets. That's our custom brushes. Okay. So in the next video, we're going to do more. We're going to start doing projects using our brushes
now to be photo shop. So see you in the
next one. Bye bye.
93. Exercise 22 – Brush image reveal effect: Here, we'll come back. In this first exercise
on the brushes, we're going to be
creating an image reveal effect using our brush. Click open. Go to the folder, that the folder for the module, which is 16 Pi tool brushes. Click on classical
Girl image and open. This is the image we're
going to be using. Come to the Crop tool. So I hit C for the crop
tool or selected here. Then I just want
to crop this image to look close to a square. Mustn't be half a square,
but something close. Get and then click Okay. And now I want to create a new folder,
create a new folder. A new layer. Bring it below. And for this layer, I'll just select my layer
and go to edit, go to file. All right I'll go to fill, then fill it with a color. This is going to
be a white color. So you have this filled
with a white color. Now the next thing I'll
do is select my image, pull down t or
option on the mark, and then click on the
layer mask button. And this are layer marks, but now we've been able to create a layer mask and fill it automatically
with a black color. So it basically covers
our image totally. Your layer mask and
then take your brush to and now go to your
brushes with your brushes, and let's now select a
very interesting brush. Let's go to GFX. This GF, we want to start using brushes like this
guy like a fork brush. Click on your layer mask
and let's put the size of your brush and just
paint on your image. We see that we are
revealing our image. Let's do this. For now, I don't like this
particular brush. Let's try the watercolor brush. The water color. No water color. Let's take this
guy, for example, just impute the size and try. You can see that it gives
us a water cool effect. I like this one. So I'm going to now select one of
these other ones. Let's take the smoke
and compute the size. I'm not going to
use my bracket keys to increase the size. Okay. Let's now do
this. Reduce the size. We don't want to click and reveal this sharp
edge of our image, so we just want to do it within very small area so that we don't reveal
that sharp edge. Now we can see that
we are revealing our sharp edge a
little bit here, so we can press X to Tg between our foreground and
background color, so we can have black, and then just click
here to cover so we can cover that this sharp
edge we are revealing. We can click a little
bit on our image. Le increase the size, and we change the resa to get to go back to your brush. Let's see presets. A the brushes.
Let's see this guy. So this guy we
concrete the kind of. Let's hit X to make this white. Okay? Now we can see that this
particular brush gives us the ability to rotate our
brushes, our brush strokes. That after every
stroke it rotates. Now, let's try some other ones. Let's see let's see this guy. Now for this one,
we want to use it to me parts of our image. The mean parts of our image, maybe the eye area
and the mouth, maybe we want to use it to clean the whole thing so that some of these parts become very visible. Perfect. Mm. We see that we are able to feel our image using our
brushes and a layer mask. Let's try changing the
color of this background. But that I'm not
going to feel it. I'm just going to create a
square and change the color. Take my square behind
my image layer, and then let's see if
another color work better. Very close to grey,
also works well. Us Perfect. I'll do it. Maybe
for an extra touch, we could just
creates a new layer. Take the brush to, and then
take some of these dashes. P the size. We want to
sample our color here. This color this grey color. I'm just using my drop two. I just hit I for my drop
two to sample this color. Then hit B, brush,
go back to brush. Let's try doing this. I'm undoing some of the strokes, reducing my size again
and then redoing it. Perfect. Close our
brushes, conclude zero. This is what we have. Now you can have a text
if you want or not. But for sure, you want to
see this controls to see, come to your fda and classical girl exercise
exercise. Perfect. Good. And there you have it. You classical girl
image revealed effect using custom brushes f. So
see you in the next one. O.
94. Exercise 23 – Dispersion effect: This exercise, we're
going to be doing what we call the
dispersion effects. So go ahead and open your
file with the folder, and let's open one
of these guys. Let's see view.
Let's just preview. Let's review them.
Let's see this guy. Not bad. So I'm going
to go with this one. So click the Mn jumping
outdoors and Perfect. Now, what I want to do first is I want to remove him
from the background. So I'm just going to
take my object selection to quickly select my object. Perfect selection. And next, I'll just
select and mask. And Photoshop remembers
my sentence, right? So I'll just hit ok, and I'll just conclude
G to duplicate. And then go ahead
and pret a new file. New file, e by e, e by e, f. Then go back, select my guy, bring
him into my new file. Perfect. Now I can
close my image. Yeah. So our dispersion
effect is meant to give us an illusion of our character
or subject dispersive. H that be dispersion. Of our character. You
might understand that, but let's just go ahead
and start creating. Create your Nula
select your brush, be a brush, or
select your brush, then go to your brushes. Now, under the
brushes, we prot in, you're going to see
this one called disperse, dispersion
photos brushes. Then the are the ones, we're going to be
using every other one. None of these are the
brushes. You see the preview. Let's just review the size here, so we can see the
preview better. This is it. This guy. This one This one, this one. So I'm looking for
one that doesn't have too much of very
regular pattern. Y that doesn't
have street edges. Some of these ones won't work. Let's try using this one. First thing I want
to do this to try this color, just paint. This is not bad conclu Z. Now, there are two tools we
need for this effect to work. First one is the drop, it for hydropat and then
sample the color of his body. Then B for a brush tool
and then now you want to pint that it looks as
if he's dispersing, like parts of his
body are green out. That's basically the
dispersion effect. And we can also sample
our white color and pint. It looks like this
disintegrating. We get that's basically
the dispersion effect. Change the brush to this one. And we might need to also
control our rotation. H. Let's see. Painting has to be so to
Celeste with our whites. So I don't want to go into
my character too much. Focus on the edges. On that and maybe make
our brush smaller. It's not looking realistic
if our brush is small. I made a mistake. I didn't
create a new layer. I'm supposed to
create a new layer. So I'll just undo some of the crush shocks and
then create a new layer. So now we have a new layer.
Now we can do this better. It means we can pinch. Like this and then go in and
kind of clean things up. Well it like this, the paint. Don't do. Paint. Paint. Paint. And then I take my ears to, so it I keyboard or the
ears are the go in. Since I don't want the effect
to affect pieces like this, es pieces like this. I Perfect. Hit B, to go back to my push to so our arc is
dispositive, right? Disintegrated. At this point, we want to change our brush. And these brushes all
have square shapes. So it's really hard to use them. So we might need to always
go in and clean things up. Maybe I'll go a bit deeper, y. And then delete
the on the parts. I did that so much.
Just the pots. Perfect. Now, I want to
start painting the colors. What I'll do is,
I'll create a newer, then start to sample
my character color. Now, I'll sample this color, hitting I for drop two, and sampling, then go to
B, then start painting. Painting. Now, I'll just hit E for my eraser to make this bigger
and just clean things up. We actually want to be able to control the hardness of our za. Let's see if we can
select preset for. Let's see that these
ones are not too good. Let's go back. Let's see if we could use some of
these guys for our user. Yeah, we can use our
mean art brush for our user so that we don't get the remnants of the ones
we've deleted, right? So select your layer back, and then let's sample
our proser color. Sample the color
and B for brush. The pit. So for this, we need to of course come
and clean eyes like this, right? Clean this sky. Maybe our ears is
doing too much, let's just go back to the tos. Now, this might take a long
time to really get perfect. Yet take some time to really
get something really good. So you have to be patient. So I'm just going to
try to hurry this up. I'm going to create a new Leer
and sample my color here. This particular color. B, then click. And apart from using my ears, I could actually
use white that's doing this to cover
up what I've, right? Yeah. So to have this also. Instead of just
using the eraser. And it actually makes
our particles smaller. Then it as and just
delete these parts. So with this, you have to really go in and clean things up. But this is basically
the dispersion effect. We're going to sell everything. And we can actually do more, but it's going to
take so much time. I don't want our video
to take so much time. But with this, we'll be
able to create a statement. We I've been able to show you what I mean by the
dispersion effect. How bad. It's going to hit D and x. D to take our colors, our background and
foreground colors back to the default and then x
to switch the colors. The background color is no black and the proground
color is no white. Now, I just want to use
this to clean up my effect. And we can save this control. And let's see this pasion. Save. Perfect. Of course, you can go in and clean things
up and make it. But that's the idea. So that's it for this one.
See you in the next one.
95. Homework: Hey, welcome back. So this is an assignment for
you to complete. Now we are done with this
S one more time and close, and go to the folder
for this module, and you're going
to see this image, these two images, this
guy and this guy on them. You're going to use this one
to do a dispersal effect, just like we did
in the last video, and then this one
for the vial effect. For the bruh vial effect. The image vial effect using
the bruh. You get to. These are the two things we are going to do this assignment. Okay. So complete
the assignments, be as creative as you can. You can add in a
little more things. Okay, Mustn't be exactly what we've learnt. You can do more. That'll be incredible.
That'll be nice. Kindly share your
project with me. I would love to see
what you come up with. Okay. So see you in
the next one. Bye.
96. Module Introduction: In this module, we work on our final projects
for this course. These projects will
cover most of what you've learned in
the past modules, and you'll surely
learn some new tricks. Kindly download the
attached project files for this module
before you continue, and please reach out
to me via message or in the Q and E section if
you have any questions. I'd love to make this course a five star experience for you. See you in the next video.
97. Beautiful Nature design in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, there, welcome
back. In this video, we're going to be covering our first design for this module. Now, this is our first design. This is beautiful nature. Okay. So this is basically a landscape image with a
text, beautiful nature. Okay? And this is
the mean walk in this design that's creating
this text, this nature. Okay? So that's the mean walk, and we're going to handle
this right away in Photoshop. Go to photoshop, click Open. Come to the folder
for this module. That's 17 final class projects. Now, come to this image, beautiful Nature and open. So this is our image.
On the next thing we're going to do
is create our text, and we have our font in the
folder in the project folder. Now, this is the phone
I'm going to use. It's called clash display font. So I have included
this font in keys. You do not have this font. Now, let's go ahead and unzip this file and then
install the fonts. Just install the phones. We have different formats
that you can install. Now, when you install the font, you come to photo shop, and then type nature. Now let's type nature. First of all, you can
select the phone, so just come to your characters panel and type clash display. After you install the phone, your clash display
phone appear here. So you choose the bold and then start to create your text. We're going to create this
text character by character. So we're going to start
with n, and then click and then hold down s by sel
in our n, hold down ls. Let me just H do and drag to the right hand side to
duplicate and then we have A. Then go back to your move tool, how l and drag to
the right hand side. Then t. Go back to
your move tool, how l and drag the right hand
side to duplicate and then, go back to the move to and do same for the
mining characters. R Perfect. Now we have our text Niche. Next thing I'll do is just
make our text bigger. And then we need to arrange
our text to overlap. Coming to the initial design, we can see how our
characters here overlap. That's what
we want to achieve. Go back to photo shop, and then we want to
overlap our character. A is going to overlap like
this, and then we have C, which is like this, and then we have, which
is something like this. Then we have R, which
looks like this, and then we have which
looks like this Perfect. Now we can go back
to see if we did the right thing and maybe adjust if we did not
do the right thing. Maybe we take this guy. So these two guys a bit lower, then bring this one a plan case. And then, let's work on. Maybe our T. Okay. O T looks just perfect. So I think we can
work with this. Okay. I think we
can work with this. Maybe I'll just
select these guys and move this just bits. Now the next thing
I'll do is I'll select all all our characters. Then click here and
make them bit bigger, M them this big, and click. So I'll just look at my text one more time to make sure
I'm not p icing anything. I think n should be lower than T. N should be lower than let's go back now
you can see, n is lower. Let's bring n lower. Dissolution too. You don't need to get it so
accurately really. I can make s a bit
different as far as it gives you what you want
and makes you satisfied. So now I have my texts arranged just like
I want them, right? The next thing I'll do is select everything control D. Sorry, control, not control D, control to duplicate, and
then control G to group. So we have a duplicate
of our text. Arranged this way.
I just dragged the group to this position, so it's below these
other texts, right? And the next thing I'll
do is select my text, right click and go
to rasterize type. We're rasterizing our type. We're making it we're turning
it into a normal layer. G to I'll do this for
all my characters. Perfect. So now all my
texts have been rasterized. Now I'm going to teach you one little trick that has
to do with selecting. So we want to add
the shadows, right? We want to add these
shadows you see. So A is casting shadows on n, then is casting shadows on T, and then R is casting
shadows on u, and E is casting shadows on R. So we want to create
these shadows in a way that they don't overlap. They don't fall
out of our texts. And if we Try normal
way of adding shadows. Let's see take a meta A and
then give it a drop shadow. We'll see that let's
just ree the size. We'll see that our shadows
are falling off, right? So we can see that
our shadows are falling off. But that's
not what we want. And if we see we're going
to paint on our liter N, let's see if we want
to paint using a brush to We still see it falling off of litter N.
So that's not what we want. We want to actually have our
shadows inside our texts. So what we want to do is we
want to select our litters, our characters, and
then pint inside them. So we want to add
shadows inside them. It means if we are going to
be doing this the normal, we come and pick our selection too and start
clicking and clicking and moving and basically selecting our sheets,
or our texts, right. But that's not what we
actually want to do. So we are not going
to take this route. Now there's a
shortcut to select. All you need to do select
your guy here, your Lita N, then come to this T thumb Neil and then pull down
control, and then click. So you have to hol down control and click
on the Tomb Neil. So with this, you can now
select just the characters. We get. So let me do
this one more time. I'm going to select
this. Then come and select my character. Let's see, I want to
use Lita T this time. So select my character,
Hol down control. Click on the thumbnail.
So you see that my Lita T has now been selected. So that's what we're
going to use to add shadows inside our text. So we're going to go
back to our Lita N and then pull down
control and click on our thumbnail and then take my ph to make my
push a bit bigger. Just this big. Maybe a bit
smaller. This is quite big. Oh. So let's see 700. So 700 ratio two and
then let's just give it zero hardness, 0% hardness. Then now make sure our
foreground color is black, so we need to start
painting over our text. You see as I paint, I'm adding this shadow in
very stain, right? And it's not falling
off of our text. Falling inside our text. So now is what we have maybe just do this
and then maybe add it so that effect is not
felt so much. Get no. Go to our selection
tool and click. All right, click and select. We see our shadow
inside our text. Now we can do same
for all the others. T is not overlapping A. So I don't need to select A. I'm just going to select t to add the shadow that litter U or will cast on T. Select litter T. Then take
your brush to one more time. I'm just going to
hit B for this, then start adding
your shadows at this. Perfect. All right
click and the select. Then now you have
to select your DU. So who control and click
on the um to select, and then tick your brush and add your shadows
one more time. Perfect. Select. And finally, select your litter
E. Then select your litter R and then
put on control and click here to select, and then go back to
your brush too and basically add your shadows. Perfect. So when you're
satisfied with what you have, you click and select, and we have our shadows added, and it's looking so perfect. Now the next thing we want
to do is select our n, and then go to filters, and then good noise and add noise because we want to
add this green effect. We want to add
this green effect. Just go on add noise. We we review the
size or the dmunt. G. So 11% should do. So add and select your next
character, go to filters, and you don't need to
go to add noise this time because we have
add noise here. We have our last filter here. You can just click add noise
and you have our noise, then do same for all
other characters. Perfect. Now the next thing
I want to handle is I want to add drop shadow
for our entire text. We get our entire text
because I want our text to cast shadows on
our background. So what I want to do is
only add the shadows on this group of texts. You get. So what I'll do is click on
them and then merge group. So they become one single
D. Then click here and to add drop shadows and just maybe increase
the acity this much. And click O G. Perfect. So this is what we have now. The next thing I'll add
is my beautiful text. Beautiful. And maybe
make it bigger, b bigger, then change the color. We have a color as yellow. Perfect. Now I'll just
change my font to this fund. It's called Gibrla Smit
to select the font. Maybe you don't have this font, and I didn't add
the font initially. So what I'll just to do
right now is go ahead and add it to the folder. So you're going to have this
font in your funder also. You just install the
font and use it. This will do. The next
thing we need to do is just add our drop
shadow to our font, and it's going to be a
very sharp drop shadow. This is what we're
going to work with. Maybe a size of three and. Perfect. On the final
thing I want to do is come and give it
a vignette effect. What I want to do here is
just create a new layer, maybe and create a
solid color layer and p. Now I'll just
go to the mask, then take a brush to
make it really big. And then just mark
out like this. Just click maybe two times and then we have
our Vnet effect. For this layer, may
make the layer 58%, and maybe even reduce
my phone size more and make the Vnet even
more more beautiful. Perfect. This is what
we have right now, we've been able to
create our design or beautiful nature graphic. That's it for this one.
See you in the next one.
98. Be the best poster design in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hello, and welcome back. In this video, we're going to
be handling this exercise. We're going to be creating
this design here in photoshop. So go ahead and open your file, open your folder, and
then select this image. This young basketballer image, so select the image and open. Perfect. The first thing
we're going to do is remove our character
from the background. Please go ahead and pick
the object selection two. And then I'll just go ahead
and click on my character. The Foot shop is going to do its magic and select
our character. And yeah, we now have
our character selected. We're just going to
come to my ball, and then click to
select my ball. Then now go back and then select the quick selection and start
adding to my selection. So I just want to
add the hands or the fingers. So these fingers. I just want to add
them to my selection. Perfect. Let's just check if we didn't select anything
that we need to select. And we selected everything
we need to select. Next thing now do is
go to my select mask. Then just make the feather 0.1, and I think this settings
are okay, click. Then just com J to duplicate
our guy from our background. Okay. Now, the first thing I want to do after
this is come to my crop two or hit
C for my crop two. Then just crop this
image, make this image. Because we want our design
to feel this image. We get how to feel this piece. Perfect. So this is good. Go back to your Move
tool and then come here. The next thing I
want I just wanted to rep this guy so that I have a copy hidden so that
in case anything happens, I can go back to my image. I'm real going to
hide this one and then and now go to my text to. Let your text to and create
theta S capital letters. He select S and then maker. And just come and choose a font. So we want to choose
a font that is stick, and I'm going to go
with proxima Nuva. Now proxima Nuva is a fit to use font for
noncommercial use, like all the others
which we've seen. Now I'm going to select
the black version. And what I've done is, I've gone ahead and added
this font to your folder. So you have the proxima Nova font in case you did not have it So we just select the black Russian
and then make this big. So we want this pig and
then maybe even big. See maybe this pig because we actually wanted
to cover the legs. Let's compare this to what we
have in our original image, and I think we have some
little adjustments to do. Maybe I'll just move this guy to the right hand side to
the right hand side, and, I think this. Perfect. I select your guy
and give it the red color. That's the text, give
it the red color. And now we want to come here, and then duplicate
our guy again. That's our character. So
duplicate this guy control G. One more time, and
just hide this layer, and now come back to your Lita S. Cool down Control
and click here, select your Lita S. Yes, so click to select your
Lita S. Let me just shift this this bar. Now, what I want
to do is come to my quick selection tool or
any of my selection tools, right click and select inverse. Okay. And then go to my
layer, my image layer. I don't want to
pick my eraser two, so hit E on your keyboard
for the eraser two. Then just right click
and make this very hard. Then let's come and start
erasing these parts like this. So erase this part, the image. And also erase this
part of the image. This is what we have.
This is what we want. We don't want to
erase this part, but we can actually do that. Well, we don't erase this
part when let's leave it. So go back to selection to
right click and the select. Perfect. Now the next
thing I'm going to do is unhide my second image layer, and then hold down. Then come and add a layer
mask and inverse layer mask. Okay. Now we can see that you
have the black color filled into our layer mask. Now, we're just going
to tick our pain to or add our push to. And then let's right
click and make sure we have the hardness, the maximum and maybe
the size to 290. Then let's click here to
reveal the ball. And his hand. So we want to just
do this in a way that the legs or the other
trousers do not be refeel. So we just want to refeel the hands just like
this. Perfect ns. Me this even smaller brush even smaller and then we
go in and hit X for the inverse so that
we can now mark out these parts of the neck or the trousers that's got
added. Mask it out. This. Perfect. I think
we do it just this part. Okay. Perfect. So this
is what we want to have. Now the next thing
I'll be, I'll just select this Lia and
select this La. I click March Les so
that we have this. Perfect. After here, just
select my guy, come to image, come to adjustment, then
give it Q and saturation, and I just want to reduce the
saturation to this level. I just want to reduce the
situation to like 85 or 83, and then we'll that
minus 83 and then heat K. And now let's just look
at our design to see. Now we can see
that our image has a bit more contrast
than what we have here. So just select the
guy, heat control L, then bring up our levels
and just make this a bit more contrast
and k. Perfect. Now the next thing I want to
do is create this effect. Now we can see when I zoom in, we can see this
color shift effect. You get this color shift effect. Now that's what we
want to create. This effect is very popular
and very common in glitches. What I did is Come
back to my image, right click on my image and then control j to duplicate it. Then just click, go to
the blending options. Now in the blending options, you're going to see
these options, right? What we want to play
with is these channels. These channels. We have the
RGB channels, all checked. If you uncheck the r, you're going to have
the G and B channel, that's the glen and blue, and
if you uncheck the green, you're going to have
the blue channel. So these are what we
want to play with. So leave the red channel
and then k. Now, I got to see any
much difference, but now I'm going to
use my keyboard keys, my arrow keys on my
keyboard to move our image. Now you can then see
the effect we get. Perfect. This is the kind of
effect we want to achieve. This will just two and maybe
control to add another one. And for this one,
we're just going to maybe leave I'm just
going to leave the blue, and then move it to the side. Perfect. So this is
what I want to create. Now, I just want to
create my background. Come and tick your
rectangle to click and just click and creates a
background. Now this is black. Just going to drag
this guy below, leave it here below our
lit S. Then let's see. We have this background that has this green f. So we want to leave it like this. Then O. Perfect. This is
what we have so far, and I like what we have so far. And next thing I'm
going to do is come to my final projects folder, and I have added this guy. It's called the crunch. Okay? It's called crunch. I just let the image and drag
it into Photoshop. It's a grange effect,
and it's a PNG image. You're going to have
it look like this, and all you then need
to do is just kill it, maybe on and scale. It's like this, and. Perfect. This is
what we now have. So let us look at our design, see if we're missing something. Maybe we need to make
our design a bit bigger. So I've selected everything. Selected my background, and also my crunch and click here, and then put down
click and drag so that I make my image
and my text bigger. Perfect. The next
thing I'm going to do is add these effects, right? These effects, and
then the text. So the text is be the
best. Be the best. So go back to the photoshop
Take your text to, and then lets just
write the best. Now I'm going to use this phone. I'm going to use the phone
we used the last time. I'm going to use my
Gibra Smith phones. Click this speaker. Then click here, then
choose this color. Click. Perfect. Then we
want to have a duplicate. So I just held down all
rag to duplicate this, and then I just want to
make this captain letters and type it's going
to be the best. For this one, I'm going to e. I'm going to choose
the Proxima fs. Proxima nova. I think we used this font for the last
we didn't use Px Manoa. But we actually used
Px Manu for this one. Now this is Px Manu,
this text here. I don't know if I
mentioned that before, but this is Proxima Nova, and I also have the font in the projects fold.
This is Px Manuva. You just have to install this
font and you're going to be able to use it like this. Now I want this to
be Proxima two, and I want this to be Let's see. Proxima Nova, and I want
this to be Extra poll. Perfect. So it's B the best. Let's change the color to black. Let's see what whites will be. Let's just use white for
noun and then for this one. Sorry, for this text, the best, I want to first of all, go and give it drop shadow. Or instead of drop shadow, I want to make the sticker. But unfortunately, we don't have options, right
to make the sticker. So what I'm going to
do is just come here, click here, and go to the color, and you see this code, this color could just right
click on it and copy and heat okay and click here
and go to stroke, and then add the stroke. Now we want to go in and
then piste our color, so control V to piece our
color and heat ok so that our stroke is the same color as our field color so that it
doesn't look awkward, right? Perfect. We've just added one pixel worth of
size to our stroke. I just hit okay to
finish everything up and then and then select
my B position it well, so we have B the best. One other thing I could
add is a drop shadow. Add drop shadow to
your text, the best. Okay. Now, drop shadow. We can just adjust the size. Maybe the sites
should be this peak, and then opacity
this much. Perfect. So we have be the best. Again, there are
some other effects. We should add this effect, this effect and the
background effect. I want to add the
background effects first. I feel the rupture
is a bit too much, but let me just finish
all the stuff first. For this, I'm just going to my a here and then click
make this bigger. Maybe I just want to create
a duplicate so that I have this one ped up to create a duplicate,
make this bigger. And you can see that it's below
or behind our background. This is what I want to do. When you have your
transformation active, you're going to have these
options on this bar here. Now, this is called
the contextual bar. And we're going to look
at this bar and use it even more in the
advanced course. You have these options. Click this one, and it's
going to flip it this way. Going to flip it
this way. You just click this option and it done. Then now let's give this black and white,
ck black and white. Black and white, then let's bland this with our background. Let's give it hot light, then just reduce pacity to this. K. So this is what
we want to have. I'm going to reduce
the drop shadow here because it's too
much. It's too much. Maybe the size maybe reduce
the size and opacity. I'm going to come
to that litter. So the next thing
I want to handle, is this guy, this guy, this guy. So for that, I just need
to create go like this. Then give the color. Come to the color
and then remember we have you can either come
here and select this color, come here and just
piece the colo, this is what I had in mind. I'm we're going to pull an t and reduce the size of
this and then this. This, perffect. I bring this guy way
down. We want it here. We can also do control
G, I duplicate, then we want to move it here, but we see that the grunge
layer is topping, right? So we want to undo, and we just want to
lock this grunge layer. So we lock the grunge
layer and select the guy, move it here. Perfect. Next, we we
create our ellipse, the same color, control V, then bring it way down. Perfect. Position it well. Basically, this is what we
have now for the drop shadow. I just want to let's see, make the size very low and this stands make the distance just
as much and he and perfect. Now we have our design. Let's go back and I prefer
this one to the original. Don't with this one, see
you in the next one. I'm just going to see
this one to control S, then see its young Masco H C. And I'll do same with the
beautiful landscape design. So C S. The beautiful landscape
save or beautiful nature. So PK and we have
our foot files, or pot design saved. Okay, so this will
come to the end of our second exercise. Hope you learned something new. So see you in the next one. Bye.
99. Torn Paper Reveal Image in Adobe Photoshop CC: Guys, welcome back.
In this video, we're going to be working on
this effect in photo shop. So this is basically a
PPA T reveal effect. We're going to work
on this in Photoshop. So go to photoshop
and file open. Then bring in our image. We have this bearded man witht. Click on the image and
bring in the image. But not just this image. We also want to bring
in the torn pipa image. Pull down Control and
click this other one to bring the boot images
into Photoshop. Perfect. Next, what I want to do is
click on my image here. And hole and bring it into our bearded
man with hot image, drop it, maybe recize
this to this point. Okay, and just kind of
position it like this. Perfect. Let's look at what we have here, and we can see that the colored image is
in the background. And then the black
and white image is the one that was torn out. So it means the black and white image is
going to be on top, select your background,
control G. Then come to image. So let's just hide this one. So we see what we're working
on to select your image, and then come to image
adjustments and black and white. Perfect. Now, we want to
just play around with some of these presets. Let's choose the blue
filter preset. Okay. Now on height, my image. That's my paper. Then the next thing I
want to do is I want to come to my quick
selection tool, select my quick
selection tool and then select my layer,
that my paper, and then start to select these omost part of
our tier effect. You get select the atomos parts of our tier effect. I'm ing, making sure I
select as much as I can. Selecting the shadows. As of the shadows
will also be good. Perfect. I'm just going to make
my bruh smaller and then select this part
also these parts, and select more B. Keep selecting. Using our peak selection too. So I just did it too much. I control Z to bring
it back to this, do it in control Z. We don't want to select
the whole thing. We just want to select
this part, right? So have to be careful. Let's just go ahead and
select this other part first. We want to join it like this and then continue our selection. So we can even go down like this to add
some of our shadows. Contro Z. So we can see that we've
selected all our shadows right, so we can just add the other
parts that we have left out. Now there is actually an
easier way to do this. But I don't want to shade in this course but
I'm not going to shade because this is
get me frustrated. Okay. So there is an easy
way to do this selection. We can just hit Q on a keyboard. We're going to have this. Okay. We can now take our brush to and then maybe
make it, bit bigger. And yeah, we could hardness to this level
or at this level. And then just kind of sorry, um, come to your foreground
color make this white. That's we do this. We can now paint over your
image like this. You can paint over
your image like this. In fact, we can make
our brush hardness bit bit accommodating so that we can have a
smoother selection. I think that will
make more sense. So this is an easier way
of doing this selection, where it's more advanced
way of being the selection. So it's going to make our work
easier. Lets just use it. So it's just a very
quick short cut, you just have to hit the
Que on your keyboard and you'll to do this selection. So we're basically using our brush to paint
our selection. Basically in our brush,
pint our selection. So this is just perfect. Now, when you're done
selecting, you can Q, and it's going to just select that part K which
you've selected. Now, let's just contribute
J to duplicate this part. If I just hide the paper, we are going to see
what we duplicated. So this what we duplicated, this part this part. And on hide our layer. What I want to do is,
I just want to add more paper make our paper fell in these empty spices to select the guy here and then just come to this rectangular,
Mike select tool. Let's just make a selection. Sorry Let's just make
selection like this. Select this and then contro g
to duplicate our selection. Just bring it below like this. And then come add a mask and its B for your brush to make your or your
hardness very low, make the size big, and then just start painting on our edges so that we don't have sharp edges any longer. Yet if you're ocuate it, go back to your
motto and you can just keep duplicating
this guy t G, and bringing it lower
to feel in our space. In order to create this
kind of variation, I'm just going to click
the edge here and then come and flip it like this. So that we have this part here. So we have this kind of
intelligent variation. Now, I've just selected
the two layers and hold on and grab them to fill
in the remaining space. Perfect. Now, I can do same
with this other guy. He select a guy. Then take your rectangular, and select to
select here control G. Hits V. I go to move to, and then just move this up, and give it a layer mask. Hits B for brush, and just pint over the edge
to remove the sharpness, then contro g, then move it up. Fill it. Perfect. Now, all you need to do is
to select all the layers apart from this
topmost one, right? To select all of them,
including the Layer one, and then I click
and Merge layers. Sorry. I did merge visible now. That's not what I want to do. I just want to Select merge layers instead
of merge physics. Select merge layers. Now we have people feeling the
whole space, right? Perfect. Now the next thing I want to
do being my background or my my black and white layer
on top here on top of here, maybe not yet, not quite yet. What I just want to do
is kind of just mask this space, this
particular spiece, out of my black and white image, so I can reveal
my colored image. You get reveal my
black and white image, just create layer mask, and then take your brush
to control or at B, and control, and then just
make the hardness 100, I use the size of
the brush like this. And start painting. Start painting. Paint here. I just want to paint
over this piece. Paint O this piece. Perfect. Sorry I
selected this guy. So let's go back to my brush to and just completes
my painting. You can see that our whites or our colored image
has been reviewed. Perfect. The next number will be just select my guy and
then kind of blend. I just want to blend. So let's
see let's see hot light. Hot light is in apartment
and just reduced opacity. Okay? Perfect. No, I just want hide my m.
That's my my tear effect. Let's see. Hey, I think we need to reduce our
opacity even more. Maybe this will do. And just select my guy are control L for levels
increase the levels. Yeah, this is basically
it for this effect. Now you can just see the
effect to controles, and let's see if it
bedded man with hut. Let's just add it at, and let's just add T PP
reveal effect reveal effect. And heat save. Okay. Perfect. This we've come to the
end of our exercise, and yeah, this is how to creates a PPA TA reveal
effect in food shop. We see here in the
next one. Bye bye.
100. The money effect in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, dear, welcome back. And this one, we're
going to be creating the money effect
in our photo shop. And this is the money effect. Now we find these
effects on currencies, and we're going to create this
right away in photo shops. So Bout photo shop, and
Gut Pu jacks Folder. And in your project follow, you're going to see
this professor, this image, the professor. So click on the image
and bring it in. Perfect. Now, the first thing I want to do is I want to reduce our image size because our
image size is quite big. So go to file and adjust or rather go to image and
instead of adjustments, go to image size. G, now, this is our image size. We see 44 " by 53 ". So what I want to
do is just met this 24 24 ", and then it. Perfect. So this
is our image now. The next thing I'm
going to do is Here, come and add the solid color. I want to make this this color. I want to make this color. You can just come and copy
the cotate grey color. This is the color code
and you can hit k. Perfect. The next thing
we're going to do is turn our layer here
into a smart object, so we convert to
smart objects so that our effects
are not permanent. So we can go back and address our effects if we
don't like how the. Perfect. The next thing
we'll do is no go filters, and go to filter galley. And just sum out so we can
see what you're doing. Now we want to go to our sketch, go to sketch, and
then we want to add two effects basically. We want to add two effects. We want to add the
half ton effect, where is the half
tone effect on is the half to effect,
half ton pattern, and we want to our
half ton size a t, and then even on contrast, we want to leave it at B three. We can also come back later on to maybe adjust the sentence. If we're not satisfied, of course, we what
we have, right? So we're just going to work
with 33 and then the dots. Then for the pattern type, we're going to choose dots. Yeah. We should work for now. Then for the next effect, we're going to add the
torn edges effect. So just come here and
click on new effect. So for this one, we're going to add the torn edges effect. For this guy, we're going to
do some more adjustments. For the image balance, we're
going to make this 26. The smoothness.
Let's make this 12. And then for the contrast, let's tick this down to two. Let's in a bit to
see what we have. Yeah, let's work
with this for now. So when you are done, just click, and the
effect is added. Now the next thing
will be to change our blending mode to hard mix. Perfect. This is
what we now have. Just select our
color filler again, then come to filter,
come to distort, come to Twirl so that we
create distal effect. So just 100 and let's
120, should work. Now we see what we've now
been able to create, right? Perfect. We've now been able
to add this two pattern that makes our artwork even
more complex. That's good. And the last thing
we want to add this, we're going to add
an adjustment er. We're going to add
a gradient map. If I upgrade the
map, just click a to change the colors and we
can change the colors. Now we can either pick
presets if we want, or you can just come
ahead and change the colors to what we
want, maybe whites. This could be green. Okay. Perfect. So
Let's maybe make this a little bit greener,
a little bit greener. And heat. Let's make
this maybe a little bit. Perfect. This is what we have. C we have the mon effect. If you're not satisfied
with the outcome, you can always go
back to your effect. You can always go back
to your effect that your tone age effect and
your half tone effect, and you can always
make adjustments, always make adjustment, maybe
let's emphasize to f and. We've increased our size to four and this is
what we have being to hit contro Z to
tick back our size 23. To this is the size
we want to work with. So the uses a bits
greener, Bats ger. Maybe I'll just address the
greens to look a bit darker. And heat O and O G. Perfect. Now, this is the moon
effect, very simple. Okay so control S s, and you can see it as profess
and then the moon effects. Perfect. See you. And with this, we've
come to the end of our exercise on the
morning effect. See you in the next one.
101. Broken Skin Effect in Adobe Photoshop CC: Hey, dear. Welcome back. Now, this is our last
video for this module. And this video, we're
going to be working on one final effect. This is the last,
but not the least. We're working on this
broken skin effect. So you're going to be
breaking his skin. Okay? Zoom in and see
the effects of close. So we're actually
cracking the skin. Okay. This is what
we're going to be creating right now
in the photo shop. So go ahead and open the image. Now this is the image, Mac
Jones, and click open. Perfect. And you also want to
open one additional image. And this is this image, the broken ride mode image. So click open to bring it in. Now, click here, drag and
bring your image here. And you guessed it. You're just basically
going to be blending our two
images together, or blending this
image to this image, right? O with this image. Perfect. So that's what
we're going to be doing. So it means we're gonna be using our blending modes, right? Yeah. I'm just going to
repeat our image like this, make our image bigger, just adjust our image like this. Perfect. In fact, I don't want this image to be this big because I don't want
the cracks to be that big, so I'm just going
to have two images. One here, that's this
big and t and drag, to have another one here. That is this big. Perfect. The next thing
I'll do is select these guys and then give them a blending mood.
Select multiply. Yeah, we don't have effect. It's that simple. You
don't have our effect. Do seem with this other guy. Select blending moods
and then select the multiply effect or the
multiply blending perfect. This is all we have. I'm just going to
select my image, L for my levels so I can
make The cracks even darker. So these are my cracks, increase the contrast
of bits. Perfect. And I'm going to do same
with this or the image. Control L from my cracks
or rather for my levels, and then just boost up
the levels a bit and make our cracks more visible. Okay. Perfect. Now. The next
thing we want to do is just start blending out the
unwanted parts, right? So select your image, put down and give it a er mask, and inverse layer mask, do seem with the other one. Perfect. So let's just bring this guy up because it's
the image on top, right? And this guy is the
crack on the chest. So I'll select the one on top, s your er mask, select your
bush to with this beaker. G, so this work, then
you start painting. You have to do this,
then start painting. Of course, we see that
our bush is very hard, so we don't want our
push to be hard. We just red the hardness. And even the size, I
think we can re the size, but we should re the size. And 1083 is perfect. 1083 pixels is perfect. So we can start
adding our cracks. Click and just click a couple of times to make to make the
crack more and more visible. Then just do this we don't want to exceed this please because we're going to
have the sharp edge effect, which doesn't make the
whole look realistic yet. So we just are going to
work on species like this. Click click click, Pret crack. Maybe pieces like this. Quickly click, creti crack. We see that we need to
just clean out thistle guy because we're still having
that sharp edge effect. At x for your black color, and then just click to
blend out this piece. Then maybe reduce your
b size and at x to swap the colors and so
that we can work on this smaller piece here without affecting
the bigger part. Perfect. I'm just going
to add my crack here. Okay. Maybe I want
to add, let me see. Yeah, I don't want to
add my cracks here. I just want the cracks to be here and now on
the chest, right? So make my brush
bigger, add my cracks. Need to select this
guy this time, select my mask,
and then now pain. Perfect. This is what we know have? Let's see our image. Let's compare it with our image. On our original image. We
actually have cracks here. So I'm just need to
reduce my pre size, and then come back to
my image. My cracks. Perfect. But I don't
want this blackness. Here, I don't want
this blackness. What I'm just going
to do is hit X, then reduce my size, so I can eliminate some
of this blackness. Okay. Perfect. Perfect. Maybe even to see here. Perfect. And also you walk on.
This is like this. Go back to move to
and control zero. And yeah. This is our broken
skin effect in Adho. And with this we've
practically come to the end of our module, and of co. So see you in the next video, which should be the. So see you. Bye bye.
102. 108 Conclusion: Hey, D, I'm really happy you met it at the
end of the course. Really excited. You
chose this course, and I'm really grateful you chose this course.
Ian's a lot to me. Okay. Now, I just want to make sure we're
on the same picture. Now, this is the B photo
shop fundamental course. And you've taken this course because before you
took this course, you basically knew
nothing about photoshop. Okay? So it's meant
for beginners, and it means there
is more to learn. Okay? Now, we have
another course, which is the advanced course, and I will strongly
recommend that you jump to the advanced course immediately after you're done,
with this course. Immediately after
you're done, it's the fundamental course. Okay, so go ahead and enroll in the advanced course and
further your knowledge. Okay. So how can
you become better? Basically by practicing
what you've learned? So I expect you to do whatever we've learned
over and over again, and you're going to
get better at it. Okay. So you should also try
to kind of have a portfolio. Of your project. So we've walked on quite a lot of
projects in this course. We can keep those
projects and create a portfolio with those projects. Now these are projects which you can shoot to clients
and shoot to your friends and well wishers so you can see the
progressive meat. And so you also can
reflect and see what you have been able to achieve and
what you've learned. So you can shoot to
clients and claims to see these projects
and know that yeah, you can handle that particular project you
want you to handle. So create a portfolio. That's very important and practice and practice and
practice and practice because that's the only way
you can get better That's by practicing and rolling
the advanced course to learn even more and
expand your knowledge. Okay, so that's
basically what I want to cover in this concluding video. And I have other courses. On B products, which
you can also learn, which I recommend
you to also get. Now, this will make
you a better designer. This will give you a holistic
knowledge of softwares. Now you have to learn softwares to become better designer. Okay, so you can also get
B Illustrator courses. These courses will
teach you how to use AD Illustto like a pro, and we also have lots of
projects in these courses. Okay, so it means
when you're done, you will have a lot of projects
for your portfolio also. Okay. And I also have a
course on motion graphics, but that's maybe for ta. Okay. I cannot want you
to focus on design. Okay, since you're taking the photoshop
fundamental course, I can't want you to focus on design based softwares for now. Okay so just master Photoshop, master that to be sido. And when you're very
comfortable with the softwares, you can then look outside
to start learning motion graphics using
software after effects, which I have a
course on that also. That's it for this video. Once again, I'm really
grateful that you've chosen this course out of all
other photoshop courses. O for this video, guys, and I hope to see you in the
advanced course. Bye bye.